3D OCT-1 Maestro2 RM E Ver.1.02 (R-OCT-1-1901-04) Compressed

PGOCTB00019-02
REPAIR MANUAL
3D OPTICAL COHERENCE TOMOGRAPHY
3D OCT-1
(Type:Maestro2)
TOPCON CORPORATION
Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
R-OCT1-1-1901-04 R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
Revision history
Staff/
Revision Date of
Description of Revisions Personnel
Number Revision
Approval
Y.Kojima
1.00 2019/01/12 Creation of new document
K.Tsubokura
Y.Kojima
1.01 2019/01/22 The changing of the authorizer
H.Okada
Y.Kojima
1.02 2019/02/05 Revision of the indicated matter with the design review
H.Okada
1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part, without prior written permission.
2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice and without legal obligation.
3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge. Please inform us of any ambiguous
or erroneous descriptions, missing information, etc.
4. Original Instructions
This manual was originally written in English.

R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
R-OCT1-1-1901-04 R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
CONTENTS
Page
1.OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................... 1-1
1.2 SPECIFICATIONS BY ITEMS ............................................................................... 1-1
1.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 DISPLAYS AND SYMBOLS FOR SAFE USE ................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION ................................................................ 1-4
1.3.3 GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION .................................................... 1-5
1.3.4 DISCLAIMERS ................................................................................................. 1-5
1.4 POSITIONS OF WARNING AND CAUTION INDICATIONS .................................. 1-6
1.5 PREPARATIONS................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 1-7
1.5.2 CONNESTING THE POWER CORD ................................................................ 1-8
1.5.3 CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINALS ........................ 1-8
1.5.4 RESTORATION FROM POWER SAVE STATE ................................................ 1-9
1.5.5 ADJUSTING THE CONTROL PANEL POSITION ............................................. 1-9
1.6 USERS OF THE REPAIR MANUAL AND NOTES ............................................... 1-10
1.7 HOW TO USE THE REPAIR MANUAL ................................................................ 1-10
1.7.1 PRIOR CONFIRMATION ................................................................................ 1-10
1.8 CONDUCT AT REPAIR TRAINING...................................................................... 1-11
2.PRODUCT OUTLINE ........................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Nomenclature ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Optical system layout diagram .............................................................................. 2-2
2.2.1 Fundus unit ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 Optical system part nomenclature and functions ............................................... 2-3
2.2.3 OCT unit ........................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 Optical system part nomenclature and functions ............................................... 2-5
2.3 Electric system layout diagram .............................................................................. 2-6
2.3.1 Electric system block diagram........................................................................... 2-6
2.3.2 Electric wiring diagram ...................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3 PCB arrangement ............................................................................................. 2-8
3.OPERATION PRINCIPLE .................................................................................................. 3-1
4.SETTING AT SHIPMENT................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Menu setting at shipment from factory ................................................................... 4-1
4.2 How to start the Tool Mode and “CAN SEND TOOL” ............................................. 4-6
4.2.1 Tool Mode ......................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.2 CAN SEND TOOL............................................................................................. 4-7

R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5.UPDATE OF SOFTWARE ................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Update of software ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 How to back up with fundus calibration data and anterior calibration data ............. 5-4
6.Repair practice ................................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Assembly and Disassembly Procedures................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Removing and assembling the chin-rest and forehead support unit .................. 6-2
6.1.2 Removing and assembling the CHIN REST PCB.............................................. 6-2
6.1.3 Removing and assembling the external fixation target ...................................... 6-3
6.1.4 Removing and assembling the cover (1/3) ........................................................ 6-3
6.1.7 Removing and assembling the switching power supply unit .............................. 6-5
6.1.8 Removing and assembling the monitor cover (1/2) ........................................... 6-5
6.1.9 Removing and assembling the monitor cover (2/2) ........................................... 6-6
6.1.10 Removing and assembling the LCD unit (3/3) ................................................... 6-6
6.1.11 Removing and assembling the LCD tilt sensor.................................................. 6-7
6.1.12 Removing and assembling the lamp house cover sensor ................................. 6-7
6.1.13 Removing and assembling the CPU FAN unit, BATTERY PCB and TEMP PCB6-8
6.1.14 Removing and assembling the GPU BOARD.................................................... 6-8
6.1.15 Removing and assembling the OCT IMG BOARD ............................................ 6-9
6.1.16 Removing and assembling the anterior segment viewing LED PCB.................. 6-9
6.1.17 Removing and assembling the anterior segment camera................................ 6-10
6.1.18 Removing and assembling the anterior segment fixation lamp LED PCB ....... 6-10
6.1.19 Removing and assembling the objective lens ................................................. 6-11
6.1.20 Removing and assembling the Galvano mirror ............................................... 6-11
6.1.21 Removing and assembling the Galvano control PCBs .................................... 6-12
6.1.22 Removing and assembling the fiber unit ......................................................... 6-12
6.1.23 Removing and assembling the optical path length correction unit, collimator flange,
and galvano holder ......................................................................................... 6-13
6.1.24 Removing and assembling the camera for shooting and observation.............. 6-13
6.1.25 Removing and assembling the line CCD camera ............................................ 6-14
6.1.26 Removing and assembling the spectroscope unit ........................................... 6-14
6.1.27 Removing and assembling the Xenon POWER PCB ...................................... 6-15
6.1.28 Removing and assembling the BASE SUB CPU PCB・OCT PCB ................. 6-15
6.1.29 Removing and assembling the OCT focusing unit........................................... 6-16
6.1.30 Removing and assembling the SLD PWR CHK PCB ...................................... 6-16
6.1.31 Removing and assembling the monitor drive unit, TRC_M2 PCB ................... 6-17
6.1.32 Removing and assembling the lower light shielding plate metal ...................... 6-17
6.1.33 Removing and assembling the POS SEN PCB2 ............................................. 6-18
6.1.34 Removing and assembling the ND filter .......................................................... 6-18
6.1.35 Removing and assembling the split unit and internal fixation lamp .................. 6-19
6.1.36 Removing and assembling the diopter compensation unit and ELBOW unit ... 6-19
6.1.37 Removing and assembling the branch mirror unit and blink detection sensor unit
....................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.1.38 Removing and assembling the Xe unit ............................................................ 6-20

R-OCT1-1-1901-04 R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
6.1.39 Removing and assembling the TRC/OCT unit................................................. 6-21
6.1.40 Removing and assembling the LIGHT SOURCE UNIT ................................... 6-21
6.1.41 Removing and assembling the Y-axis detection sensor................................... 6-22
6.1.42 Removing and assembling the Y-axis drive unit .............................................. 6-22
6.1.43 Removing and assembling the XY-axis drive unit ............................................ 6-23
6.1.44 Removing and assembling the X-axis sensor ................................................. 6-23
6.1.45 Removing and assembling EXTERNAL I / F PCBs ......................................... 6-24
6.1.46 Removing and assembling 3P SW CABLE UNIT ............................................ 6-24
6.2 Inspection and Adjustment Procedures ............................................................... 6-25
6.2.1 Adjustments and Cautions when replacing each unit ...................................... 6-25
6.2.2 Adjustment of the SLD light intensity at objective lens .................................... 6-27
6.2.3 Adjustment of the light intensity sensor at objective lens................................. 6-30
6.2.4 Confirmation of PD current value .................................................................... 6-35
6.2.5 Replacement / Check of Xenon PCB .............................................................. 6-40
6.2.6 Adjustment of the observation light intensity ................................................... 6-46
6.2.7 Adjustment of blink detection .......................................................................... 6-49
6.2.8 Adjustment of the photography observation camera ....................................... 6-58
6.2.9 Adjustment of white balance ........................................................................... 6-73
6.2.10 Stereoscopic camera orientation ..................................................................... 6-79
6.2.11 Adjustment of TRC Focus ............................................................................... 6-92
6.2.12 Installing the split unit/adjustment ................................................................. 6-100
6.2.13 Adjustment of the split bar focus position .......................................................6-111
6.2.14 Split analysis frame adjustment/Luminance adjustment ................................ 6-120
6.2.15 Adjustment of the center ghost ..................................................................... 6-127
6.2.16 TRC_M2-PCB Adjustment ............................................................................ 6-138
6.2.17 Adjustment of OCT-PCB ............................................................................... 6-143
6.2.18 Adjustment when replacing GPU_BOARD .................................................... 6-151
6.2.19 Pupil position adjustment .............................................................................. 6-160
6.2.20 Galvano adjustment ...................................................................................... 6-164
6.2.21 Adjustment of the 0D focus for focusing lens ................................................ 6-172
6.2.22 Adjustment of OCT focusing ± 15D focus ..................................................... 6-176
6.2.23 Check of optical axis deviation for focusing lens ........................................... 6-179
6.2.24 Check of image unstableness for focusing lens ............................................ 6-183
6.2.25 Scan length adjustment ................................................................................ 6-186
6.2.26 Adjustment of the internal fixation LCD position ............................................ 6-197
6.2.27 Adjustment of the aperture selector unit position .......................................... 6-203
6.2.28 Adjustment of Spectrometer and Line CCD................................................... 6-211
6.2.29 CCD shift ...................................................................................................... 6-223
6.2.30 Rescaling ...................................................................................................... 6-233
6.2.31 Adjusting the optical path length ................................................................... 6-256
6.2.32 Confirmation and adjustment of interference sensitivity ................................ 6-264
6.2.33 Replacement of fiber unit .............................................................................. 6-272
6.2.34 Anterior OCT Calibration............................................................................... 6-277
6.2.35 Replacing the OCT IMG Board ..................................................................... 6-324

R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7.TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 You may not get high-sensitive OCT image.Proceed？[xxxxxx] ............................. 7-1
7.2 SLD light source error(xx) Please turn the power switch OFF. ............................... 7-3
7.3 Trouble in the parts related with B-scan image ...................................................... 7-4
7.4 Trouble in the parts related with Control Panel(LCD Touch panel) ......................... 7-5
7.5 Trouble in the parts related with Camera ............................................................... 7-7
7.6 Troubles in the parts related with Galvano mirror .................................................. 7-8
7.7 Troubles in the parts related with Fundus image ................................................... 7-9
7.8 Troubles in the parts related with boot up ............................................................ 7-10
7.9 Troubles in the parts related with polarization controller ...................................... 7-10
7.10 Xe light source error（xx）. Please turn the power switch OFF. .......................... 7-11
7.11 Others ................................................................................................................. 7-11
8.Error Message List........................................................................................................... 8-1
9.Check sheet...................................................................................................................... 9-1
10.TOOL LIST .................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Special tool list .................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Tool software ....................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3 General repair tools ............................................................................................. 10-8
11.Appendix....................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Cleaning of the objective lens.............................................................................. 11-1
11.2 Galvano mirror cleaning ...................................................................................... 11-3
11.3 OCT optical cleaning ........................................................................................... 11-5
11.4 Pasting dustproof tape · sponge .......................................................................... 11-9
11.5 Cable wiring method.......................................................................................... 11-13
11.6 Items and Functions of Graph tool Software ...................................................... 11-22
11.7 Connecting CCD-Camera.................................................................................. 11-25
11.7.1 SONY XC-EI50 ............................................................................................. 11-25
11.7.2 Basler(USB3.0 type) ..................................................................................... 11-27
11.8 GENERAL INFORMATION ON USAGE AND MAINTENANCE ......................... 11-33
11.8.1 INTENDED PATIENT POPULATION ............................................................ 11-33
11.8.2 INTENDED USER PROFILE ........................................................................ 11-33
11.8.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR USE ............................................... 11-33
11.8.4 STORAGE, USAGE PERIOD ....................................................................... 11-33
11.8.5 ELECTRIC RATING ...................................................................................... 11-34
11.8.6 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION ......................................................................... 11-34
11.8.7 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT........................................................................ 11-34
11.9 Electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................................ 11-35
11.9.1 Requirements for the EXTERNAL DEVICE ................................................... 11-39
11.9.2 PATIENT’S ENVIRONMENT ......................................................................... 11-40
11.9.3 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE PERSONAL COMPUTER
(COMMERCIALPRODUCT) TO BE CONNECTED ....................................... 11-41

R-OCT1-1-1901-04 R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
11.9.4 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE INSULATION TRANSFORMER
(COMMERCIALPRODUCT) TO BE CONNECTED ....................................... 11-41
11.10 3D OCT-1 SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS ........................................................ 11-42
11.10.1 PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING “LICENSE TERMS” CAREFULLY BEFORE
USING OR INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE! ................................................ 11-42
11.10.2 LICENSE TERMS........................................................................................ 11-42
11.11 Installation of Clean Booth during Repair of Medical Devices ............................ 11-45
11.12 Service News History ........................................................................................ 11-48

R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
R-OCT1-1-1901-04 R-DRIOCT1-0-1010-01
1-1
3D OPTICAL COHERENCE TOMOGRAPHY – 3D OCT-1(Type:Maestro2) – Repair Manual
1. OVERVIEW
PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS
The product is a special imaging device that observes, photographs, and records fundus images,
anterior segment images, and fundus tomographic images, and provides them as electronic images for
diagnostic purposes.
By attaching the attachment for the anterior segment, which is an optional accessory, to the product,
tomographic images of the anterior segment can be observed, photographed, and recorded. (The anterior
segment attachment is optional.)
Images of the fundus and anterior segment are taken with a built-in digital camera.
The photographed fundus, anterior segment, fundus, and anterior segment images can be recorded on a
personal computer connected to the product (hereinafter referred to as the "PC"). The control panel
displays the observation image and the shot image. Auto alignment function and manual alignment
function are available.
In some product, fundus and anterior segment images cannot be taken (hereinafter referred to as
"fundus images cannot be taken").
Some product images cannot be taken except fundus, anterior segment, and fundus tomography (3D
wide scan only) (hereinafter referred to as "screening images").
SPECIFICATIONS BY ITEMS
Item Specifications
Observation & photographing of the fundus
• Type of photography Color (Note 3), Red-free (Note 1) & IR (Note 4)
• Picture angle for 45° ±5% or less
observation/photogr 30° or equivalent (digital zoom) (Note 3)
aphy
• Operating distance 34.8 ±0.1mm (when taking a picture of fundus)
• Normal pupil diameter : φ4.0mm or more
Observable/photograp Small pupil diameter : φ3.3mm or more
hable diameter of pupil
• Fundus image Center : 60 lines/mm or more
resolution(on fundus) Middle (r/2) : 40 lines/mm or more
Middle (r) : 25 lines/mm or more
IR photography : Center: 5 lines/mm or more (Note 4)
Observation & photographing of the fundus tomogram
• Scan range Horizontal direction 3 – 12mm ±5% or less
(on fundus) Vertical direction 3 – 9mm ±5% or less
• Scan pattern (Note 5) 3D scan (horizontal/vertical)
Linear scan (Line-scan/Cross-scan/Radial-scan)
• Scan speed 50,000 A-Scans per second
• Lateral resolution 20μm
• In-depth resolution 6μm
• Photographable φ2.5mm or more
diameter of pupil
Observation & photographing of the fundus image/fundus tomogram
• Fixation target Internal fixation target:
Dot matrix type organic EL
The display position can be changed and adjusted. The displaying
method can be changed.
Peripheral fixation target:
This is displayed according to the internal fixation target displayed
position.
External fixation target

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-2
Observation & photographing of anterior segment

• Type of photography Color (Note 3) & IR (Note 4)
• Operating distance 62.6 ±0.1mm (when taking a picture of anterior segment) (Note 2)
Observation & photographing of the anterior segment tomogram (Note 6)
• Operating distance 62.6 ±0.1mm (when taking a picture of anterior segment) (Note 2)
• Scan range Horizontal direction 3 – 6mm ±5% or less
(on cornea) (Note 2) Vertical direction 3 – 6mm ±5% or less
• Scan pattern Linear scan (Line-scan/Radial-scan)
• Scan speed 50,000 A-Scans per second
• Fixation target External fixation target
(Note 1) Digital red-free photography that processes a color image and displays it in pseudo-red-free condition
(Note 2) When the attachment for anterior segment is included in the system configuration
(Note 3) Concerning this item, the instrument without the fundus photography function is excluded.
(Note 4) This is used only for recording the position where a tomogram is captured.
(Note 5) In the instrument for screening, it is possible to use only "3D Wide Scan (scan size: Vertical 9mm ×
horizontal 12mm)".
(Note 6) Excludes the instrument for screening.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DISPLAYS AND SYMBOLS FOR SAFE USE
The main body of the equipment and the instruction manual contain important information in order to
prevent harm to users and others and damage to property from occurring and to ensure safe and
correct use.
Be sure to understand the following labels and symbols before reading "General information on
safety" and observing the instructions.
(1) Description of the display
(2) Symbol displayed on the outside of the main unit

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-4
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
This instrument must not be used for the following patients:

• Patients who are hypersensitive to light
• Patients who recently underwent photodynamic therapy (PDT)
• Patients taking medication that causes photosensitivity.
Preventing Electric Shocks and Fires

To avoid fire and electric shock, install the instrument in a place free of water and other liquids.
To avoid fire and electric shock, do not put cups or vessels containing liquids near the instrument.
To avoid fire in the event of an instrument malfunction, immediately turn OFF ( ) the Power switch and
unplug the cable if you see smoke coming from the instrument or if you detect other problems.
Don't install the instrument where it is difficult to unplug the cable from the instrument body.
Ask your dealer for repairs.
Do not disassemble, modify or repair the equipment. Doing so can cause electric shock or fire.
Proposition65 warning sentence

WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including Lead, which is known to the State
of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
Ensuring the Safety of Patients and Operators

Use this instrument carefully on the following patients.
• Patients who have epidemic corneitis, conjunctivitis or any other infectious disease
• Patients who are taking medications that cause light hypersensitivity.
Be careful not to hit the patient's eyes or nose with the instrument during operation.
The patient may be injured.
When operating the chinrest up/down button, be careful not to pinch the patient's hand to avoid possible injury.
When opening the patient's eye, be careful for operating the instrument.
[The patient may be injured.]
Preventing Electric Shocks and Burn

To avoid electric shock, do not insert metal objects into any vents and/or slots.
To avoid electric shock, do not open the instrument.
Request service from an authorized Topcon distributor.
To prevent the instrument from malfunctioning, do not drop any liquid into the vent
[Electric shock may cause an injury.]
Users should not rely solely on images made using the device in making decisions regarding diagnosis
or other therapeutic procedures, but should rely on their own expertise and judgment.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-5
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Never perform maintenance work except for service personnel to ensure safety and maintain
performance. However, the following items can be maintained by the customer.
Read the contents of the main text for the maintenance method.
(1) Cleaning the objective lens

The objective lens can be cleaned. See "Objective Lens Cleaning" in Chapter 11.1 for details.
(2) Maintenance of electromagnetic compatibility

To ensure electromagnetic compatibility of the equipment and system, check the connection condition of the
power supply, including the protective ground wire, on a regular basis.
DISCLAIMERS
• TOPCON shall not take any responsibility for damage due to fire, earthquakes, actions by third
persons and other accidents, or damage due to negligence and misuse by the user and any
use under unusual conditions.
• TOPCON shall not take any responsibility for damage derived from inability to properly use this
instrument, such as loss of business profit and suspension of business.
• TOPCON shall not take any responsibility for damage caused from using this instrument in a
manner other than that described in this Instruction Manual.
• Diagnoses made shall be the responsibility of pertaining doctors and TOPCON shall not take
any responsibility for the results of such diagnoses.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-6
POSITIONS OF WARNING AND CAUTION INDICATIONS

To ensure safety, this machine provides warning displays. Use the instrument correctly by observing
the display instructions. If any of the following display labels are missing, contact your TOPCON
dealer at the address listed on the back cover.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-7
PREPARATIONS
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
• The instrument should be moved by two people holding the bottom of the device. Be sure
to hold the bottom with two people.
To avoid injury, be aware of projections at the bottom.
Carrying by one person may cause harm to his/her back or injury by
falling parts. Also, holding areas other than the bottom and holding the
External I/O terminal cover may cause injury, as well as damage to the
instrument.
• To prevent damage and injuries, do not install the instrument on an
uneven, unsteady or sloped surface.
• When setting an instrument on an instrument table, pay attention not
to catch the patient's fingers between the instrument and the table.
• If you have Chinrest unit during transportation, unpacking or at installation,

Chinrest unit can get out a position. Due to this reason, there may affect the
performance of the auto alignment.
• Do not place the instrument in an area where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Automatic alignment may not be performed correctly.
(1) Hold the specified position of the instrument firmly with both hands and place it on the optical table.
Place where the equipment is locatedHow to Hold Equipment

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-8
CONNESTING THE POWER CORD

• Be sure to connect the power plug to an AC 3-pin receptacle equipped
with grounding. Connection to a receptacle without grounding may
cause electric shock in the case of shortcircuiting.
• To avoid electric shocks, do not handle the power plug with wet fingers.
• The power cord in standard accessories for this instrument cannot use
besides this instrument.
(1) Make sure the POWER switch of the instrument is turned OFF.
(2) Connect the power cord to the Power inlet.
(3) Insert the power cord plug into the 3-pin AC grounding receptacle.
CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINALS

Use the external device conforming to IEC60950-1.
For connecting to an external device, contact your TOPCON dealer or the
offices listed on the back cover.
Data output
The product can be connected to a personal computer or the like via local area networks.
(1) Connect the cable (LAN cable) to the output terminal of the product.
LAN output USB input

(2) Connect the other end of the connection cord (LAN cable) to a PC, etc.
(3) Mount the external input/output terminal cover.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-9
RESTORATION FROM POWER SAVE STATE

Product employs a power-saving method as a power-saving function. The product power save method
works when the main unit is not operated within the specified time.
(1) Tap the control panel.
The power save is released and measurement is possible.
The time to start the power save status can be changed in the System setting
menu "Power Save Timer (Min)".
You can change the duration of the transition to the power save mode by "Setting up function" or
"Setting up system" in "POWER SAVE TIMER (minutes)".
ADJUSTING THE CONTROL PANEL POSITION

The product taps the control panel to move the jaw rest up and down, aim, measure, etc. The control
panel can be turned up, down, left, and right. Adjust it to an arbitrary position before use.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-10
USERS OF THE REPAIR MANUAL AND NOTES

When repairing a product, it is essential to attend a repair seminar at Topcon Co., Ltd. from the
viewpoint of product safety. In particular, be careful and confirm that the light intensity of the
superluminescent diode (SLD) is adjusted.
It is recommended to work in clean rooms and clean booths (Appendix 11. 8) because any dust or dirt
on the optical system will affect the shooting. Be careful not to touch the optical system or dust on the
product for disassembly and assembly adjustment.
HOW TO USE THE REPAIR MANUAL

Follow the flowchart below when checking, adjusting, or repairing the product.
PRIOR CONFIRMATION
● Be sure to read the instructions in Section 1.3 prior to using the product.
● Refer to "Connecting external input/output terminals" in Chapter 1.6 for connection to various
devices.
● If you want to repair first, read from Chapter 6, "Repair Practices" or Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting".
Working procedure Applicable item Page described
Trouble shooting Chapter 7
Initial inspection Failures
Normal
Inspection
Abnormality
Confirmation of defective Disassembly and assembly Chapter 6.1

parts procedure Chapter 6.2
Inspection and Adjustment
Procedure
Chapter 6.2
Finding the causes
Inspection and Adjustment
Procedure
Repair execution
Abnormality
Inspection
Normal
Ending

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-11
CONDUCT AT REPAIR TRAINING

The objective of the repair seminar is to understand the functions and principles of the 3D OCT 1
MaestroII (hereinafter referred to as MaestroII) and to learn how to repair the instrument in the event
of a malfunction. To this end, we will take part in troubleshooting as a serviceman, replacing and
adjusting various parts according to the intended use.
The contents of the standard training in each chapter are as follows.
Before participation in repair seminars (e-learning)

As a preliminary course prior to participation in repair seminars, we will learn products through e-learning.
Chapter 1 Overview
Learn product characteristics and safety precautions.
Chapters 2 and 3 Product Summaries and Principles

Learn about the names, functions, arrangements, and principles inside the product.
Chapter 4 Shipping Settings

Learn about factory settings, explanation of settings, and service man mode.
Chapter 5 Software Update

Learn how to check the version of the software and update the software.
Confirmation of Chapter 7 (including content of Chapters 6, 8, 9 and 10)

Based on troubleshooting, learn how to replace, adjust, and check the parts in the appropriate place from
the error message.
Confirmation of understanding after participation in repair seminars

Confirm the understanding of the repair trainees through a questionnaire, and perform paper tests and
hands-on tests to confirm the understanding of the repair trainees.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
1-12

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-1
2. PRODUCT OUTLINE
2.1 Nomenclature

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-2
2.2 Optical system layout diagram

2.2.1 Fundus unit
⑨
⑧
⑰
⑦
⑯
⑥
⑱
⑮
⑤
⑭
VIEW A
⑬
㉓
③
⑫
⑩
㉑
⑲
②
⑪
①

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-3
2.2.2 Optical system part nomenclature and functions

Fundus unit
NO. Name Function Remarks
1 Objective lens This is the basic lens which leads the illumination Any dust or soil on the
light to the fundus and the light reflected from the surface is flare.
fundus to the photography system.
2 Pinhole mirror Splits the illumination system and photography Be careful about
system. damage and dust.
3 Focusing lens unit Forms the fundus image on visual field aperture.
4 Internal fixation Projects the internal fixation target to the patient’s
mirror eye.
5 Internal fixation LCD Target for internal fixation target
6 Observation band Relay the fundus image as the observation system
pass filter through the imaging camera.
7 IR correction lens IR filter for observe the fundus image.
8 Relay lens unit Relays the fundus image to the photography camera.
9 Photography camera Takes a picture of fundus.
unit
10 Cornea aperture Regulates the fundus illumination.
11 Relay lens unit Relays the fundus illumination to the patient’s eye.
12 Black spot lens Removes the light reflected from the objective lens Any offset will produce
in the illumination light. ghost in the center of
the photograph.
13 Relay lens unit Relays the fundus illumination to the patient’s eye.
14 Crystalline lens Regulates the fundus illumination.
aperture
15 Beam splitter Transmits the photography illumination light and
reflects the IR illumination light.
16 Iris aperture Regulates the fundus illumination.
17 Xenon unit When photographing, illuminates the patient’s eye.
18 LED for IR LED for IR illumination
19 Diopter compensation Inserted in the case of the patient with high myopia.
lens
(-)
20 Diopter compensation Inserted in the case of the patient with high
lens (+) hyperopia.
21 Anterior segment lens Automatically inserted when positioning for the
patient’s eye.
22 Split aperture Target for split illumination
23 Split relay lens Relays the split aperture.
24 Split LED Illuminates the split.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-4
2.2.3 OCT unit

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-5
2.2.4 Optical system part nomenclature and functions

OCT unit
NO. Name Function Remarks
1 SLD (Light source) Light source for OCT (Center wavelength 840nm)
2 Optical fiber coupler Splits/joins the SLD optical signal.
3 SM fiber core Makes the SLD light of the probe unit go into/out of the fiber.
4 Collimator lens Converts the SLD light of the probe unit from the fiber into
the parallel flux.
5 Corner cube Reflects the SLD light of the probe unit and changes the light
path.
Moves the light path to the optical axis direction according to
the patient’s axial length.
6 Galvano mirror Scans the SLD light on fundus.
7 Focusing lens unit Changes the formed image of SLD light according to the
patient’s dioptric power.
8 Sensor for light Sensor to detect the SLD light intensity
intensity at objective
lens
9 Imaging lens unit Relays the light formed by the focusing lens to the place at
objective lens. (This and pupil lens are regarded as a set.)
10 Mirror Reflects the SLD light of the probe unit and changes the light
path.
11 Pupil lens This works with the lens No.9 placed at the pupil imaging
position.
12 Wavelength Reflects the SLD light of the probe unit and transmits the
separation filter short wavelength light from visible light and SLD light.
13 Variable attenuator Attenuates the SLD light strength. There is not an automatic
adjustment mechanism.
14 Polarization Changes the polarization of SLD light by stressing the fiber
controller and using its double refraction.
15 Optical fiber coupler Splits/joins the SLD optical signal.
16 SM fiber core Guides the SLD light of the probe and reference unit to the
spectroscope unit.
17 Collimator lens Converts the SLD light from the fiber into the parallel flux.
18 Grating Gives an angle for each wavelength by using the light
diffraction to perform spectral resolution of SLD light.
19 Fourier conversion After spectral resolution has been done on SLD light by
lens grating, the SLD light is imaged on the sensor by this lens.
20 Reflection mirror Reflects the SLD light and changes the light path.
21 Line CCD camera Detects the spectrum of SLD light.
22 ND filter ND filter for Anterior segment CCD camera
23 Focusing Lens Relay the anterior image to anterior CCD camera
24 Anterior segment
CCD camera
25 Dispersion Control the degradation of dispersion Smoothing the
compensation rod refractive index
of the optical
system

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
+24V Trigger/Release 2-6
2.3
CAN
2.3.1
AC input TRC focusing motor
Base X motor TRC focusing position sensor
Base X position sensor Diopter compensation motor
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
Power supply unit Base Y motor Diopter compensation position sensor
・Inlet +24V BASE_Sub_CPU-PCB
・Power switch Base Y position sensor Aperture selector motor
・SWpower supply Base Z motor Aperture selector sensor
Base Z position sensor Xenon lamp Split IN/OUT motor
Trigger/Release Xenon power supply PCB Chin-rest motor Split IN/OUT sensor
Chin-rest control PCB External fixation Split motor
Fundus observation/ lamp LED Split position sensor
TRC_M2

Fundus photography Light path selector motor
Camera USB 3.0 -PCB Light path selector IN/OUT sensor
LVDS Split LED
LCD
USB GPU Board IR LED for observing fundus
3D OPTICAL COHERENCE TOMOGRAPHY –
Touch panel
Electric system layout diagram
Electric system block diagram
（TK1 module + IO Board） IR LED for observing anterior segment

Battery
Peripheral fixation LED
FAN motor Internal fixation lamp LCD
External USB USB Cover detection sensor
USB device LCD reverse detection sensor
External YUS USB
USB device Blink detection sensor
LAN Light path length compensation motor
External LAN
External I/F PCB

personal Light path length compensation position sensor
PCIe CSI
computer Anterior segment OCT focusing motor
NTSC_CSI- observation camera OCT focusing position sensor
PCB Polarization control motor
Image Anterior segment
observation camera OCT- Polarization control position sensor
arithmetic board +12V/+3.3V
CameraLink (CIBT4) PCB Y axis compensation motor
Line CCD camera Sync
Y axis compensation 0 detection sensor
Sensor for light intensity at objective lens

+24V SLD
3D OCT-1(Type:Maestro2) – Repair Manual
Galvano scanner (XY axis)

2-7
2.3.2 Electric wiring diagram

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-8
2.3.3 PCB arrangement

(1) SW POWER SUPPLY (47010 6100)
AC INPUT
to 3P inlet +24V
to BASE_SUB_CPU_PCB
CN201
[Function]
• Supplies power to POWER RELAY PCB/TRC PCB/OCT POWER PCB.
(2) BASE_SUB_CPU_PCB (1021086-01)

to TRC_M2-PCB J201
to GPU_BOARD CN8510 to OCT-PCB J240 to TRC_M2-PCB J203
CN204 CN203 (+24(V)) CN214
to SW POWERSUPPLY
+24V
CN201
to XENON POWER
PCB to CHIN REST
CN226 CN225 PCB
CN206
CN229 CN227 CN210 CN213 CN208

to TWO_PHASE_MOT U to PHOTO_SENUNIT_Y
to PHOTO_SENSOR_X to Y MOTOR
to TWO_PHASE_MOT to PHOTO_SENSOR_Z
[Function]
• Drive of X, Y, Z axis motor and zero position detection
• Drives the chin-rest.
• Power supply to GPU_BOARD, OCT-PCB, XENON PCB
[Check pin] [Switch]
SW1: Reset switch
Pin Voltage value Pin Voltage value
TP1 +5V(4.86-5.22V) TP 3 (or Z 10) +12V(11.60-12.36V)
Z122 +5V(4.86-5.22V) TP4(or Z9) +12V(11.63-12.55V)
TP2 +3.3V(3.20-3.43V) TP5(or Z5) +8.5V(8.33-8.88V)
Z123 +3.3V(3.20-3.43V) Z6, Z8, Z11, DG
Z150, Z157, etc.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-9
(3) GPU_BOARD (1022298-01)
to EXT I/F BOARD

J122
CN4560
to EXT I/F BOARD to LCD_UNIT
J121 CN4561 CN301
CN6000 to NTSC_CSI-PCB to
to CPU_FAN_UNIT UNIT CN11 CN4580 COLOR_CAMER
CN7200 A_USB3
CN5700
CN6600 CN1100 CN4300 CN8200

to BATTERY PCB
to TRC_M2-PCB CN205 to OCT_IMAGE-BOARD CN10
[Function]
• Power supply to OCT-PCB and image calculation
• Image calculation of line CCD camera
• LAN communication
(4) NTSC_CSI-PCB UNIT (1022101-01)
to ANT_OBS_CAMERA (Master) to ANT_OBS_CAMERA (Slave)

J12 J13
J11(Back side)
to GPU_BOARD CN5700
[Check pin]
Pin Voltage value Pin Voltage value Pin Voltage value
TP1 +3.3V±0.16V Z15 +1.8V±0.05V Z20 +1.8V±0.05V
TP2 DG Z16 +1.8V±0.05V Z21 +1.8V±0.05V
TP3 +1.8V±0.05V Z17 +1.8V±0.05V Z22 +1.8V±0.05V
TP4 +1.8V±0.05V Z18 +1.8V±0.05V
Z12 +3.3V±0.16V Z19 +1.8V±0.05V

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-10
(5) EXT I/F PCB(1026847-01)

to GPU_BOARD CN4560
to GPU_BOARD CN6000
J122
J121
J120
to OCT IMG BOARD CN1
[Function]
• USB communication
• LAN communication
(6) OCT IMG BOARD (47011 67000)

to L_CCD_CAM_E2V
CN9
to EXIT I/F PCB

J120 CN1
to OCT-PCB
CN7 J210
CN6 CN10 (Back side)

to OCT_PCB J245 to GPU_BOARD CN4300
[Function] [DIP Switch]

• Supplies power to the fundus observation camera and Bit Setting Function
performs the image calculation. Bit1 OFF Unused
• Performs the image calculation for the line CCD camera. Bit2 OFF Unused
• LAN/USB communication (Line CCD:e2V product)
Bit3 OFF Unused
Bit4 OFF Unused

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-11
(7) TRC_M2-PCB (1022959-01)

to GPU_BOARD CN6600
to BLINK_SENS_PCB to POS_SEN-PCB2 J291
to ANT_OBS_LED-PCB J742 to POS_SEN-PCB2 J293
J251 J250 J208 J260
to ZEN_FIX_LED-U to PHOTO_SEN-PCB1 J225

J238
J262 to PHOTO_SEN-PCB2 J227
to COLOR_CAMERA to POS_SEN-PCB2 J290
_USB3 J205
to LCD_TURN_ to PHOTO_SEN-PCB3
SENSOR J273 J263 J225
to OCT-PCB J282
J261
to BASE_SUB_ to OLED_RLY-PCB
CPU_PCB CN214 J203 J239
J201 J272 J265 J271

to BASE_SUB_CPU_PCB to COVER SENSOR to IR_LED-PCB J520
CN203 to SPLIT_LED_PCB
[Function]
Lighting/control of each light source
Anterior segment Anterior segment SPLIT LED PCB IR / TRC correction
fixation LED observation LED switching sensor
TRC focusing sensor Diopter compensation Aperture selector Split IN/OUT sensor
sensor sensor
Split drive sensor Observation LED Fixation LED Cover detection sensor
LCD reverse sensor Blink detection sensor
Supplies power to each PCB.

COLOR CAMERA
ANTERIOR CAMERA
CPU FAN UNIT
LCD UNIT
[Check pin]
Pin Voltage value Pin Voltage value Pin Voltage value
TP1 DGND TP4 +24V±1.2V TP8 +12V±0.6V
TP2 +12VA±0.6V TP5 DGND TP9 +3.3V±0.3V
TP3 AGND TP7 -12VA±0.6V TP11 Blink Sensor
Observation light level 3 (closed eyelid state)
0.6V～0.8V
[Check pad] [Switch] [DIP Switch]

Pad Contents SW Contents Bit Setting Function
CP2 +12.8V±0.6V(0LED) SW1 Reset switch Bit1 OFF Unused
CP28 +3.0V±0.05V SW2 Unused(All off) Bit2 OFF Unused
CP33 +3.3V±0.3V(0LED) Bit3 OFF Unused
Bit4 OFF Unused

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-12
(8) OCT PCB (1021856-01)

to R_POS_SEN-PCB J293
to POS_SEN-PCB3 J291
to POS_SEN-PCB4 J291
to TRC-M2-PCB J261 to SLD_PWR_CHK-PCB
to GALVANO_UNIT J1 to SLD_MODULE-PCB
J242 J282 J280 J734 J243
to L_CCD_
CAM_E2V J213
J240 J210
J212 J245 J281 J287
to GALVANO_UNIT J3 to Y-AXIS_MOTOR
to OCT_IMG-BOARD CN7 to Y-AXIS_SEN_UNIT
to BASE_SUB_CPU_PCB CN203 to OCT_IMG-BOARD CN6
[Function]
Supplies power to each PCB. Each unit control
Optical path length correction motor Galvano UNIT
OCT focusing motor Y axis sensor unit
Polarization control motor SLD MODULE PCB
Y axis motor SLD PWR CHK PCB
OCT_IMG_BOARD（CIBT4）
Line CCD CAMERA
[Check pin]
Pin Voltage value
TP1 DGND
TP3 AGND
TP11 SLD_ANODE
[Check pad]
Pad Contents Pad Contents
CP+24 +12±1.2V CP+5.2VA +5.2±0.25V
CP-12VA -12±1.2V CP+15V +15.0±1.5V(Power supply for galvano driver)
CP+12V +12±1.2V CP-15V -15.0±1.5V(Power supply for galvano driver）
CP+12VA +12±1.2V CP+15Vccd +15.0±1.5V(Line CCD voltage)
CP+3.3V +3.3±0.15V CPVREFA +3.0±0.05V
CP+3.3Vcibt +3.4±0.20V CPVref_DAC 5.0±0.10V
CP+1.2V +1.2±0.10V CPVref_OS +2.0V(Galvano offset voltage)
[Switch] [LED]
SW Contents LED Contents
SW1 Reset switch LED1 +24V
SW2 Unused (All off) LED5 SLD_ANODE(TP11)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-13
(9) XENON POWER PCB (40496 6320)
to XENON unit
to POWER RELAY PCB J102
[Function]
• Supplies the XENON lighting power.
[Volume]
VR1: Adjustment of the XENON light intensity
(10) R POS SENSOR PCB (47010 6540)
J292
to the polarization control motor
J293
to OCT CTRL PCB J280
[Function]
• Relays the polarization control motor drive.
(11) R POS SENSOR PCB2 (47010 6550)
J292
to the diopter compensation motor
J293
to TRC PCB J260
[Function]
• Relays the diopter compensation motor drive.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-14
(12) PHOTO SENSOR PCB1 (47010 6630)

to DC_MOTOR_UNIT1
J226
to TRC_M2-PCB J262
J225
(Back side)
[Function]
• Detects the split IN/OUT.
• Relays the drive motor drive.
(13) PHOTO SENSOR PCB2 (47010 6640)
to DC_MOTOR_UNIT1
J228
to TRC_M2-PCB J262
J227
[Function]
• Detects the aperture “0”.
• Relays the selector motor drive.
(14) POS SENSOR PCB2 (47010 7110)
to DC_MOTOR_UNIT1
J290
J291
to TRC_M2-PCB J262
to DC_MOTOR_UNIT1
J290
J291
to TRC_M2-PCB J260
[Function]
• Detects the fundus focusing lens position.
• Split drive position detection.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-15
(15) POS SENSOR PCB3 (47010 7120)
to DC_MOTOR_UNIT1
J290
J291
to TRC_M2-PCB J262
[Function]
• Detects the OCT unit focusing lens position.
(16) POS SENSOR PCB3 (47010 71900)
to DC_MOTOR_UNIT1
J290
J291
to OCT-PCB J280
[Function]
• IR / TRC correction switching detection.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
2-16

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
3-1
3. OPTICAL PRINCIPLE
The patient's eye is illuminated by near infrared light, which is emitted by the fundus illumination
optical system (IR LED and xenon lamp (*1)). The fundus observation/photography optical system
forms an image on the image pick-up element (fundus observation camera), and the image can be
observed on the control panel.
The system works as follows: when operating the buttons which are displayed on the control panel
by the software, the photography light, which is emitted by the fundus illumination optical system,
illuminates the patient's eye. The image, which is received by the image pick-up element (fundus
photography camera) built in the fundus observation/photography optical system, is recorded as an
electronic fundus image (*2). You can also set "digital zoom" that extracts and saves the center of
the photographed image (equivalent to angle of view of 30°) through software. (*1)
The anterior segment/fundus tomogram is obtained by using the optical interference
phenomenon.
Near infrared light, which is emitted by the super luminescence diode (SLD), is separated by the
fiber coupler. One portion of the separated light is guided to the prism and is reflected by it, before
returning to the fiber coupler. The other portion of light is guided into the eye and is reflected by the
cornea/fundus tissues, before returning to the fiber coupler. When the two reflected portions of lights
join and overlap, a low interference wave with differing amplitude is generated. This wave is
separated by the diffraction grating and is then converted into the electric signal by the line CCD.
This signal is then processed to observe, photograph and record the anterior segment/fundus
tomogram.
Using the sensor built in the auto alignment optical system (anterior segment observation LED and
camera), the auto alignment function detects the positions of the pupil and instrument.
Then, the instrument is moved to a position applicable to photography.
There are two auto focus functions, "Split auto focus function" and "OCT auto focus function". The
user should select and use one of them. The split auto focus function detects the reflected image of
the split lines projected to fundus. Then, the lens in the observation/photography optical system is
moved to a proper position by the auto focus mechanism to adjust focus correctly. In the case of the
OCT auto focus function, the lens in the observation/photography optical system is moved to a
proper position by the auto focus mechanism in order to get the optimum image quality level
(coefficient calculated by S/N ratio) of the observed fundus tomogram. So focus is adjusted
correctly.
By continuously photographing, recording and processing the fundus/anterior segment
tomogram, analysis such as three dimensional display, fundus image display or quantitative
measurement is conducted.
(*1) The instrument without the fundus photography function is excluded.

(*2) The instrument without the fundus photography function records the observed image as "still
image"and "electronic fundus image". It cannot emit the photography light and record an
electronic image withthe fundus photography camera.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
3-2

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-1
4. SETTING AT SHIPMENT
4.1 Menu setting at shipment from factory
Photography Setting
Utility button Item button Item selector button At shipment
Fixation TYPE CONSTANT
• Changes lighting/blinking of the internal (Lighting)
fixation target. FLICKERING 
(Blinking)
SPEED NORMAL (Hz) 1-8 1
• This is valid when the internal fixation target
is set to "FLICKERING" (Blinking).
• Set the blinking speed for all other states
except when photographing.
SPEED MEASURE (Hz) 1-8 2
• This is valid when the internal fixation target
is set to "FLICKERING" (Blinking).
• Set the blinking speed for photographing.
Brightness 1-10 10
• Sets the brightness of the internal fixation
target.
Shape (Default) 1 dot 
• Sets the shape of the internal fixation target.
X
Shape (Additional) Not in use 
4 dot rectangle
Cross
Screen Display Constant 
Given time
Fundus photo Blink Detection Level OFF
*3
LOW 
NOMAL
OCT+Color Mode High ISO 
･Changes the color fundus image quality Normal ISO
(High/Normal/Low).
Low ISO
Flash Level (OCT+Color Mode) 1.0Ws to 16.0Ws *1
Gain (OCT+Color Mode) 0 to 9,BS,AC*2 *1
Color Mode High ISO 
Normal ISO
Low ISO
Flash Level (Color Mode) 1.0Ws to 16.0Ws *1
Gain (Color Mode) 0 to 9,BS,AC*2 *1
Adjust Flash at Peripheral Photo 0 to +4 +1

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-2
Adjust Flash at 30° Mask Photo -4 to +4 -1

Peripheral Photo Sequence Chinrest screen 
Capture screen
Peripheral Photo Pattern 4X,4+,5X,5+,8,9 9
Peripheral Photo Fixation Move Auto 
Manual
Illumination OCT Scan (Normal) 1 to 4 3
Level
Fundus Photo *3 1 to 4 3
OCT Z lock position 0 to 9,BS,AC *2 250
Settable range: 120 - 765
Z lock position - 3D Wide 0 to 9,BS,AC *2 450
Settable range: 120 - 765
OCT-LFV OFF
ON 
OCT-LFV (Scan Adjust) OFF
ON 
*1: For the flash level and Gain of each image quality at shipment, refer to the table below.
Flash level Gain
Image
Setting at Setting at
quality Settable range Settable range
shipment shipment
High 1.0～16.0Ws 4.0Ws 0～63 0
Normal 1.0～16.0Ws 2.0Ws 0～63 8
Low 1.0～16.0Ws 1.0Ws 0～63 21
*2: Ten keys are displayed.

*3: In the instrument without the fundus photography function, this is not displayed.
Auto Operation
Auto Alignment ON/OFF OFF
ON 
ACTION Discontinuous
Continuous 
Timeout (Sec) OFF,10,20,30 20
Manual Mode two cameras 
one camera
Focus ON/OFF OFF
ON 
Timeout (Sec) 10,20,30 10
One Touch Auto Focus OFF
one time 
sequence

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-3
OCT Focus Split

OCT 
Split+OCT
OCT: Retry OFF

ON 
Small Pupil *1 ON/OFF OFF 
• This function is usable only when the
color fundus capture icon is selected. ON
• When the pupil diameter of the patient is
Magnification Mode 45°Mask 
small (pupil diameter is approx. φ4.0mm
or less), the small pupil diaphragm is 30°Mask
automatically set and the instrument takes
a color picture of the fundus. After
taking a picture, the small pupil dia-
phragm is automatically removed. When
you set the small pupil diaphragm selector
button to "ON" on Area 1 of the
photography screen (color photography),
the above automatic setting is not done.
Auto Optimize ON/OFF OFF
ON 
Auto Z OFF
•Detects the retina posi- ON 
tion automatically, and
always displays the fun-
dus tomogram clearly
during observation.
Z-lock After Auto Z OFF
•After "Auto Z", the ON 
photographed fundus
image is fixed.
Auto Pola OFF
•Adjusts the output ON 
sensitivity of the fundus
tomogram to the
optimum automatically.
Auto Operation Auto Shoot Timer (sec) 1.3.5.8.10.15 3
OU Capture Right eye →Left eye 
Left eye →Right eye
OFF
Show Preview OFF
ON 
Preview method *2 Both eyes
Each eye (with timer)
Each eye 
Preview Timer (sec) *3 3, 5, 10 5
Check Alignment OFF 
Result ON
Check Alignment 3, 5, 10 5
Timeout *4
AutoShoot OFF
ON 
Auto Cataract ON/OFF OFF
ON 
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-4
*1: In the instrument without the fundus photography function, this is not displayed.
*2: When "ON" is set for "Preview", it is valid to change setting for this item.
*3: When "ON" is set for "Preview" and "Each eye (with timer)" is set for "Preview method", it is valid to change
setting for this item.
*4: When "ON" is set for "Alignment check", setting for this item is valid.
System setting
System Setting Measurement Sound OFF 
Sets ON/OFF for the measurement sound. ON
Power Save Timer (Min) 0 to 60 10
Sets the time until the power save function is ON.
Display Brightness 1 to 10,send 5
Sets the brightness of control panel.
Packing Mode Start
Tap the [Start] button, and the head unit and
chinrest move to be in the packaged status.
Language Japanese(JP)
Set the display language English(US) 

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-5
Capture icon protocol

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-6
4.2 How to start the Tool Mode and “CAN SEND TOOL”
4.2.1 Tool Mode
(1) Start the main unit.
(2) When the main unit is started, long-press the [SETUP] at the top right of the screen.
(3) The password input screen is displayed, so enter the password and press the [OK].
(4) Tool Mode is displayed.
Tool Mode (page 1/9)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-7
4.2.2 CAN SEND TOOL

(1) Start up the Tool Mode.
(2) Tap the [Back] or [Next] to access the page 9/9.
(3) Tap the [Start] of CAN SEND TOOL.
(4) Tap the [Yes] in the dialog box of “Execute?”.
(5) CAN SEND TOOL is displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
4-8

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5-1
5. UPDATE OF SOFTWARE
5.1 Update of software
Purpose
Update for customer’s request or after the release of latest version.
Necessary Tools
Tool Name Tool No. Image
Version up file - -
USB memory -
*Please do not use USB memory with security function
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Store the software for UPDATE into the USB memory.
*File configuration
• MAESTRO2_****.zip (**** means version.)
• MAESTRO2_Update
• OCT_UpdateAppPro
• OCT_UpdatePro
(b) Turn on the instrument.
Connect the tool USB memory to the USB port of the instrument.
(2) Software update

(a) Tap [Set up].
(b) Tap "Information" → "Version Up" → "UPDATE".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5-2
(c) The software update check screen appears. Tap the [OK] button.
Update of software starts.
(d) Tap the [OK] button when the dialog box is displayed.
Update of software starts.
(e) When update is finished, the following message is displayed.

Displayed message: SOFTWARE UPDATE COMPLETE!
(f) Tap the [Please turn off the power] button to turn OFF the power.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5-3
(g) After turning the power ON, confirm normal movement.
• The message shown below may appear in some cases.

When the message below is displayed and rebooting the instrument, the display becomes
black during boot up and it may take more than 5 minutes to restart the device. Do not turn
off while restarting. If Turn OFF while restarting, the instrument cannot boot up normally.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5-4
5.2 How to back up with fundus calibration data and anterior calibration
data
Purpose
Back up for Fundus calibration data and Anterior Calibration data
Necessary Tool

USB memory ‐
PC -
Procedure
(1) Enabling export of anterior segment CLB file
• If the procedure described in (1) is not performed and the procedure described in (2) is
performed, the item "anterior segment CLB file" is not displayed on the screen described
in (2)(c).
(a) Insert the USB memory into the instrument and turn the power ON.
(b) Enter [Settings], set [Options] →[ Anterior OCT seg.] in [Page 7 /9] to “ON”, and tap [OK].
(c) The following message appears. Tap OK.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5-5
(2) Exporting rescaling files (fundus CLB files) and anterior segment CLB files
(a) Enter the setting menu in tool mode.
(b) Tap [Info] → [Export] and tap [Export] in [Rescale File] and [Anterior Eye CLB File], respectively.
(c) Remove the USB memory, Insert the USB memory into the PC.
(d) Make sure that the "oct" folder is created immediately below the USB memory and the CLB files of the
anterior segment and fundus are exported.
└─oct
├─XXXXXX_3DOCT-1_ANTERIOR.CLB
└─XXXXXX_3DOCT-1_FU NDUS.CLB
• "XXXXXX" at the top of the CLB file is the body serial number.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
5-6

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-1
6. Repair practice
Use the torque driver to tighten the screws in the disassembly and assembly according to the screw
tightening torque table below.
Since the mirror base and Y-axis drive unit of the main unit are made of resin, it is dangerous that
the screw hole will be damaged if the tightening exceeds the torque shown below.
Screw tightening torque table (resin for screw hole)

Nominal Tapping screw [cN.m] Subject
M2 35 Optical base
M2.5 60 Optical base
M3 85 Optical base
※ Reference
The following table shows the torque when the conventional iron screw is attached to the other metal
part.
Screw tightening torque table (screw hole material is metal)
Nominal Tapping screw [cN.m] Subject
M2 26.5 -
M2.5 51.9 -
M3 90.2 147
M4 225.4 343
M6 754.6 1176

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-2
6.1 Assembly and Disassembly Procedures

6.1.1 Removing and assembling the chin-rest and forehead support unit
Schematic representation Removing method
(1) Removal of the chin rest unit ①.
(a) Remove the cover cap ②.
(b) Remove the screw ③.
1 (c) Remove the jaw receiving cover ④.
(d) Remove the earth cable ⑤.
(e) Remove the cable connected to the chin-receiving
PCB.
4 (f) Remove the four screws ⑥.
(g) Remove the chin rest unit ①.
Assembly point
• Reverse the disassembly procedure.
3
2 5
6
6.1.2 Removing and assembling the CHIN REST PCB

(1) Removal of the jaw receiving ASSY ①.
(a) Remove the four screws ②.
(b) Remove the jaw receiving ASSY ①.
(c) Remove the cable connected to the jaw receiver.
(2) Removal of the CHIN REST PCB ③
(a) Remove the four screws ④.
(b) Remove the CHIN REST PCB ③.
1 Assembly point
• When replacing the CHIN REST PCB, measure the
resistance between No.1 and No.2 of the mounted
CHIN REST PCBVR1 with a tester, and adjust VR1
2 so that it is equal to the measured resistance before
mounting.
3
4

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-3
6.1.3 Removing and assembling the external fixation target

(1) Removal of the external fixation unit ①
(a) Loosen the screw ②.
1
(b) Remove the external fixation target unit ①.
2 Assembly point
6.1.4 Removing and assembling the cover (1/3)

(1) Removal of the lamp house cover ①
5 4 (a) Turn the screw ②.
3
1 (b) Remove the lamp house cover ①.
9 2
(2) Removal of the head cover right ③
(a) Remove the two cover caps ④.
4
(b) Remove the two screws ⑤.
7
7 (c) Remove the two screws ⑨
8 8
(d) Remove the head cover right ③.
(3) Removal of the head cover left ⑥.
(a) Remove the three cover caps ⑦.
10 (b) Remove three screws ⑧.
(c) Remove one screw ⑩.
(d) Remove the left ⑥ of the head cover.
6
Assembly point
8 • Reverse the disassembly procedure.
Rear 7
10 9

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-4

(1) Removal of the front cover ①
(a) Remove three cover caps ②.
(b) Remove the three screws ③.
5
4 6
(c) Remove the front cover ①.
5
6 (2) Removal of the middle cover right ④
(a) Remove the two cover caps ⑤.
(b) Remove the two screws ⑥.
(c) Remove the middle cover right ④.
8
9
(3) Removal of the middle cover left ⑦.
2
(a) Remove the two cover caps ⑧.
3 1 (b) Remove the two screws ⑨.
8
(c) Remove the middle cover right ⑦.
7 Assembly point

(1) Removal of the base cover (right)①
(a) Remove the two cover caps ②.
(b) Remove the two screws ③.
5 (c) Remove the screw ④.
(d) Remove the base cover ① to the right.
6
(2) Removal of the base cover (left) ⑤.
8 (a) Remove the two cover caps ⑥.
7 (b) Remove the two screws ⑦.
1
(c) Remove the screw ⑧.
3 (d) Remove the left ⑤ of the base cover.
Assembly point
4 2

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-5
6.1.7 Removing and assembling the switching power supply unit

(1) Removal of the switching power supply unit ①
(a) Remove the connected connector.
(b) Remove the four screws ②.
(c) Remove the switching power supply unit ①.
Assembly point
1
6.1.8 Removing and assembling the monitor cover (1/2)

(1) Removal of the monitor mechanism cover front ①.
(a) Remove the cover cap ②.
(b) Remove the screw ③.
(c) Remove the front cover ① of the monitor
4 mechanism.
(2) Removal of the cover of the monitor mechanism ④
(a) Remove the two screws ⑤.
(b) Turn the monitor up.
5
6 (c) Remove ④ after the cover of the monitor
1 mechanism.
(3) Removal of the monitor cover after ⑥
5
(a) Remove the four cover caps ⑦.
3 (b) Remove the four screws ⑧.
2
(c) Remove ⑥ after monitor cover.
Assembly point
7

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-6
6.1.9 Removing and assembling the monitor cover (2/2)

(1) Removal of the monitor cover front ⑨.
9
(a) Remove the four screws ⑩.
(b) Remove the front ⑨ of the monitor cover.
(2) Removal of the monitor cover lower part ⑪
10 (a) Remove the two screws ⑫.
(b) Turn the monitor up.
(c) Remove the monitor cover lower part ⑪.
11 Assembly point
12
6.1.10 Removing and assembling the LCD unit (3/3)

(1) Removal of the LCD unit ①
(a) Remove the connector connected to the LCD unit.
(b) Remove the four screws ③.
(c) Remove LCD unit ①.
1
2
Assembly point
Conductive tape 1 • Gasket 1
Gasket1 13 mm from the center and top of the monitor
• Gasket 2
Place just above the bar code seal. The ears extend
evenly.
Bar code seal • Conductive tape 1
Cut to 25mm × 35mm: 2 pieces
Gasket2 ※ Close contact between sheet metal and LCD
Conductive tape 2
•
The amount of tape
protrusion is 5 mm. Conductive tape 2
Cut to 25mm × 30mm: 2 pieces
Paste from the end of the center sheet metal R.
※ Adhesion between sheet metal and LCD.
The amount of tape protrusion is 5 mm.
※ To be caught by the rotating plate.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-7
6.1.11 Removing and assembling the LCD tilt sensor

(1) Removal of the LCD tilt sensor ①
(a) Remove the screw ②.
(b) Remove the sensor plate ③.
(c) Close the claw and remove LCD tilt sensor ①.
Assembly point
3
2
6.1.12 Removing and assembling the lamp house cover sensor

(1) Removal of the lamp house cover sensor ①
(a) Remove the two screws ②.
(b) Remove cover detection plate ③.
(c) Close the claws and remove the lamp house cover
sensor ①.
Assembly point
2

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-8
6.1.13 Removing and assembling the CPU FAN unit, BATTERY PCB and TEMP
PCB
(1) Removal of the CPU FAN unit ①
2
(b) Remove CPU FAN unit ①.
1 (2) Removal of the BATTERY PCB ③
(a) Be connected to the BATTREY PCB
(b) Remove the connector.
(c) Remove the two screws ④.
(d) Remove the BATTERY PCB ③.
Assembly point
6.1.14 Removing and assembling the GPU BOARD

(1) Removal of the GPU BOARD ①
2 (a) Remove the four screws ②.

(b) Remove the shield metal plate ③.
3
(c) Remove the cables connected to the GPU
BORAD.
(d) Remove the screw ⑥.
4 (e) Remove the protective metal plate ⑤.
(f) Remove the spacer ④.
(g) Remove the GPU BOARD ①.
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-9
6.1.15 Removing and assembling the OCT IMG BOARD

(1) Removal of the OCT IMG BOARD ①
(a) Remove the two screws ⑤.
(b) Remove the two screws ②.
(c) Remove the OCT IMG BOARD ① with the sheet
metal ⑥.
3 (d) Remove the two screws ④.
2 1
6 (e) Remove the radiator plate ⑧.
7
(f) Remove the wafer ⑦.
8
(g) Remove the four screws ③.
4 (h) Remove the OCT IMG BOARD ①.
Assembly point
6.1.16 Removing and assembling the anterior segment viewing LED PCB
(1) Removal of the anterior segment viewing LED
PCB (right)①
1 (c) Remove the right 1 of the anterior segment
viewing LED PCB.
(2) Removal of the anterior segment observing LED
PCB left ③
2
(b) Remove the two screws ④.
3
4 (c) Remove the left ③ of the anterior segment

viewing LED PCB.
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-10
6.1.17 Removing and assembling the anterior segment camera

(1) Removal of the anterior segment camera right ①
(c) Remove the anterior segment camera right ①.
2 (2) Removal of the anterior segment camera left ③
1 3
(c) Remove the left ③ of the anterior segment
camera.
Assembly point
4
6.1.18 Removing and assembling the anterior segment fixation lamp LED PCB
(1) Removal of the anterior segment fixation lamp
LED PCB ①
(a) Remove the connectors connected to the TRC
PCB J238.
(c) Remove the anterior segment fixation lamp LED
PCB (right)①.
1
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-11
6.1.19 Removing and assembling the objective lens

(1) Removal of the objective lens ①
(a) Remove the objective cap ②.
(b) Turn and remove the holding ring ③.
(c) Remove Objective ①.
1
3
Assembly point
2
6.1.20 Removing and assembling the Galvano mirror

(1) Removal of the Galvano Mirror (Y)①
(a) Remove the connected cable.
(c) Remove the Galvano mirror (Y)①.
(2) Removal of the Galvano Mirror (X)③
4
1 2 (c) Remove the Galvano mirror (X)③.

Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-12
6.1.21 Removing and assembling the Galvano control PCBs

(1) Removal of the Galvano Control Unit①
2
(c) Remove the Galvano control unit ①.
1
(2) Removal of the Galvano Control PCB(Y)③
(a) Remove the two screws ④.
3 (b) Remove the Galvano control PCB(Y)③.
4 (3) Removal of the Galvano Control PCB(X)⑤
(a) Remove the two screws ⑥.
(b) Remove the Galvano control PCB(X)⑤.
Assembly point
• Apply a heat sinker (silicon grease).
5 6 Name: Silicon grease
Model number: G746 (200 g)
Manufacturer: Shin-Etsu Silicone
6.1.22 Removing and assembling the fiber unit

Collimator flange (1) Removal of the Fiber Unit ①

4 (b) Remove the fiber cover ③.

(c) Remove the fiber connector from the
spectroscope.
3
1
2 (d) Loosen the two screws ④ connecting the
collimator flange and the fiber coupler, and
remove the fiber coupler.
(e) Remove the four screws ⑤.
(f) Remove the fiber unit ①.
Assembly point
4
5

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-13
6.1.23 Removing and assembling the optical path length correction unit, collimator
flange, and galvano holder
(1) Removal of the Optical Path Length Correction
Unit ①
(b) Remove the three screws ②.
1 (c) Remove the optical path length correction unit ①.
(2) Removal of the collimator flange ③
(b) Remove the collimator flange ③.
2
5
(3) Removal of the Galvano Holder ⑤
(b) Remove the Galvano holder ⑤.
3 Assembly point
6
4
6.1.24 Removing and assembling the camera for shooting and observation
(1) Removal of the camera for shooting observation ①
(b) Remove the shooting observation camera ①.
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-14
6.1.25 Removing and assembling the line CCD camera

(1) Removal of the line CCD camera ①
(a) Remove the cable connected to the line CCD
camera.
(b) Mount the spectrometer holder.
(c) Mount the spectrometer to the spectrometer
holder together with the sheet metal to which the
spectrometer is fastened.
(d) Remove the two screws ②.
7
(e) Remove the line CCD camera ①.
8
(f) Remove the two screws ③.
4 6 5
(g) Remove the camera rotation flange ④.
(h) Remove the camera fixing plate ⑥.
(i) Remove the two screws ⑦.
3
2 1 (j) Remove the heat sink ⑧.
Assembly point
6.1.26 Removing and assembling the spectroscope unit

(1) Removal of the spectroscope unit ①
(b) Remove the three screws ②.
(c) Remove the three screws ③.
(d) Remove the spectroscope unit ①.
2 (e) Remove the spectroscope holder.
1 Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-15
6.1.27 Removing and assembling the Xenon POWER PCB

(1) Removal of the Xenon POWER PCB ①
(b) Remove the four screws ②.
1 (c) Remove the shield metal plate ③.
4
(d) Remove the two spacers ④.
2
(e) Remove Xenon POWER PCB ①.
3 Assembly point
6.1.28 Removing and assembling the BASE SUB CPU PCB・OCT PCB
(1) Removal of the OCT PCB ①
3 (b) Remove the four screws ②.
(c) Remove OCT PCB ①.
(2) Removal of the BASE SUB CPU PCB ③
4
(b) Remove the four screws ④.
(c) Remove the BASE SUB CPU PCB ③.
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-16
6.1.29 Removing and assembling the OCT focusing unit

(1) Removal of the OCT Focusing Unit ①
(a) Remove the sponge ②.
(b) Remove the three screws ③.
3 (c) Remove the screw ④.
(d) Remove the OCT focusing unit ①.
2
4
1
Assembly point
• Mount the OCT focusing unit in the upper right
direction.
• Adjust and press the end surface of the sponge ②
Align the sponge end with the
against the upper part.
upper part. • BASE SUB CPU PCB mounting screws do not use
* Paste it so as to press it. FWSs because the screw hole land diameter is small.
Make sure that the convex
portion of the focus is covered. Fill the gap with
the motor with a
Cover the "cover sheet metal"
thin tool etc.
and the gap.
6.1.30 Removing and assembling the SLD PWR CHK PCB

(1) Removal of the SLD PWR CHK PCB ①
(a) Remove sponges ② and ③.
6 1 (c) Remove the screw ⑤.
(d) Remove SLD PWR CHK PCB ①.
3
2 5
4
Align the top edges of the two parts.
Assembly point
• Place the sponge ③ on the inside so that it can be
aligned with the lower side as much as possible.
• Adjust sponge ② to the upper end of sponge ③ and
attach it to the inside so that the clearance is as small
as possible.
Include • Paste sponge ② from the top, including the wiring.
Align it with Make sure that no gaps wiring and
the lower side. are formed as much as paste on top.
possible. Putting it to
the inside and sticking.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-17
6.1.31 Removing and assembling the monitor drive unit, TRC_M2 PCB
1 (1) Removal of the monitor drive unit ①
2 (a) Remove the four screws ④.
Dowel
(b) Remove the monitor drive unit ①.
(2) Removal of the TRC_M2 PCB ③
(b) Remove the four screws ④.
(c) Remove TRC_M2 PCB3③.
2
Assembly point
6.1.32 Removing and assembling the lower light shielding plate metal
(1) Removal of the Lower Light Shield Metal ①
(b) Remove the light-shielding plate ①.
(c) Remove the dust-proof part ③
3
1
Assembly point
2

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-18
6.1.33 Removing and assembling the POS SEN PCB2

(1) Removal of the light-shielding metal plate ①
1 (a) Remove the black tape.
4 3 5 (b) Remove the six screws ②.
(c) Remove the light-shielding plate ①.
6 (d) Remove the connected connector.
(2) Removal of the POS SEN PCB2 ⑥
2
(a) Remove the three screws ⑤.
(b) Remove the sensor fixing plate ③.
Put the gaps of sheet metal (red dotted (c) Remove the screw ④.
line in the figure) with black tape.
(d) Remove POS SEN PCB2 ⑥.
Assembly point
Attach the black tape to the part protruding from

the ridgeline of the sheet metal, the edge of the
sheet metal, and the mirror body base.
Attach it to the part where

the black tape is in contact.
6.1.34 Removing and assembling the ND filter

(1) Removal of the ND Filter ①
(b) Remove ND Filter ①.
2 Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-19
6.1.35 Removing and assembling the split unit and internal fixation lamp
(1) Removal of the Split Unit ①
(a) Remove the three screws ②.
(b) Remove the split unit ①.
8 (2) Removal of the POS SEN PCB2 ⑥
7 (a) Remove the connected connector.

9
10
(b) Remove the three screws ④.
(c) Remove the sensor fixing plate ⑤.
1
(d) Remove screw ⑥.
6
(e) Remove the POS SEN PCB2 ③.
(3) Removal of the internal fixation lamp ⑦
3 (a) Remove the two screws ⑧.
5 2
4
(b) Remove the internal fixation lamp ⑦.
(c) Remove the two screws ⑩.
(d) Remove the internal fixation lamp PCB⑨.
Assembly point
6.1.36 Removing and assembling the diopter compensation unit and ELBOW unit
(1) Removal of the diopter correction unit ①
2 1
(b) Remove the diopter correction unit ①.
(2) Removal of the ELBOW unit ③
(a) Remove the four screws ④.
(b) Remove the ELBOW unit ③.
Assembly point
3
4
• Insert the diopter correction unit into two convex
positions of the mirror body and tighten the screws.
Diopter compensation unit ELBOW unit • Insert the ELBOW unit into the three convex positions
of the mirror, and tighten the screws.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-20
6.1.37 Removing and assembling the branch mirror unit and blink detection sensor
unit
(1) Removal of the Branch Mirror Unit ①
(b) Remove the branch mirror unit ①.
(2) Removal of the blink detection sensor unit ③
1
(a) Remove the screw ④.
2 (b) Remove the blink sensor unit ③.
3
Assembly point
4
6.1.38 Removing and assembling the Xe unit

(1) Removal of the Xe unit ①
(a) Loosen the two screws ②.
(b) Move the Xe unit ① to the left and remove it.
1
2
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-21
6.1.39 Removing and assembling the TRC/OCT unit

(1) Removal of the mirror unit ①
(a) Remove the four screws ② fastened to the aircraft
sheet metal.
1 (b) Remove TRC/OCT Unit ①.
Assembly point
6.1.40 Removing and assembling the LIGHT SOURCE UNIT

(1) Removal of the LIGHT SOURCE UNIT ①
(b) Remove the two screws ③.
(c) Remove LIGHT SOURCE UNIT ①.
2
Assembly point
*Remove the mirror body from • Reverse the disassembly procedure.
the stand and remove the
hexagonal screw on the back of
the "airplane sheet metal"

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-22
6.1.41 Removing and assembling the Y-axis detection sensor

(1) Removal of the Y-axis detection sensor ①
(a) Remove the sheet metal for sensor detection ③.
(b) Remove the screw ②.
2
(c) Remove the Y-axis detection sensor ①.
3
Assembly point
6.1.42 Removing and assembling the Y-axis drive unit

(1) Removal of the Y-axis drive unit ①
(a) Remove the two hex screws ②.
1 (b) Remove the Y-axis drive unit ①.

(c) Remove the screw ④.
(d) Remove Box Sheet Metal ③.
3 Assembly point
4

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-23
6.1.43 Removing and assembling the XY-axis drive unit

2
(1) Removal of the XZ drive unit ①
1 (b) Remove the XZ drive unit ①.
Assembly point
6.1.44 Removing and assembling the X-axis sensor

(1) Removal of the X-axis sensor ①
2 (a) Remove the screw ②.
(b) Remove the X-axis sensor ①.
1
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-24
6.1.45 Removing and assembling EXTERNAL I / F PCBs

(1) Removal of the EXTERNAL I/F PCB①
2
(b) Remove EXTERNAL I/F PCB①.
1
Assembly point
6.1.46 Removing and assembling 3P SW CABLE UNIT

(1) Removal of the 3P SW CABLE UNIT①
2 (a) Remove the screw ②.
(b) Remove the 3P SW CABLE UNIT ①.
Assembly point

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-25
6.2 Inspection and Adjustment Procedures

6.2.1 Adjustments and Cautions when replacing each unit
When replacing the units of the electric system as the result of troubleshooting, the necessary
adjustments and cautions are show below.
Replacement Parts
or Phenomenon
Replacement of the aperture selector unit position
Replacement of the TRC_M2-PCB(1022959-01)

SLD light volume exceeds upper limit. [100112]
Replacement of the OCT_ PCB(1021856-01)

You may not get high-sensitive OCT image.
Replacement of GPU Board (1032008-01)
(COLOR CAMERA UNIT(1032014-01))
Replacement/Adjustment of Line CCD
Replacement of Split unit(1024778-01)

(ANT OBS CAMERA(1010902-01))
Replacement of Stereoscopic camera
Adjustment of Center Ghost / Flare

Replacement of the objective lens
SLD light source error. [110103] /

Replacement of Basler camera
Remake Anterior Calibration
Proceed ? [300428] .[300429]

Xenon light source error(xx)
Adjustment of Auto Focus
Adjustment Item
Galvano Error
(1024779-01)
Estimated repair time (minutes) 240 210 330 240 240 330 240 210 240 300 700 900 300 300 155 335
Cleaning of the 11.1

① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ① ①
objective lens
Assembly and 6.1
Disassembly ② ① ② ② ② ② ② ② ② ② ② ③ ② ② ② ②
Procedures
Adjustment of the 6.2.2
SLD light intensity ④ ⑭ ⑩
at objective lens
light intensity sensor ③ ⑬ ⑲
at objective lens
Confirmation of PD 6.2.4 ③ ②
current value
Replacement / Check 6.2.5 ③
of Xenon PCB
observation light ⑨
intensity
Adjustment of blink 6.2.7 ⑩
detection
Adjustment of the 6.2.8 ③
photography camera
Adjustment of White 6.2.9 ④
Balance
Stereoscopic camera 6.2.10 ③ ③
orientation
Adjustment of TRC 6.2.11 ⑤ ④ ⑥ ④
focus
Installing the split 6.2.12 ④ ④ ③ ⑤ ⑤
unit/adjustment
split bar focus ⑥ ⑤ ⑤ ⑦ ⑥
position
Split analysis frame 6.2.14
adjustment/Luminan ⑦ ⑥ ⑥ ⑧ ⑦
ce adjustment
Adjustment of the 6.2.15 ③ ④
center ghost
TRC_M2-PCB 6.2.16 ③
Adjustment
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-26
Adjustment of 6.2.17 ⑦ ③
OCT-PCB
Adjustment when 6.2.18
replacing ②
GPU_BOARD
Pupil position 6.2.19 ⑤ ⑨ ⑨
adjustment
Galvano adjustment 6.2.20 ⑦ ⑥ ⑩
0D focus for ⑧ ⑤
focusing lens
Adjustment of OCT 6.2.22
focusing ± 15D ⑪ ⑥
focus
Check of optical 6.2.23
axis deviation for ⑫ ⑦
focusing lens
Check of image 6.2.24
unstableness for ⑬ ⑧
focusing lens
Scan length 6.2.25 ⑧ ⑦ ⑳
adjustment
internal fixation ⑧
LCD position
aperture selector unit ③
position
Adjustment of 6.2.28
Spectrometer and ③ ⑩ ⑮
Line CCD
CCD shift 6.2.29 ⑤ ⑭ ㉑
Rescaling 6.2.30 ④ ⑫ ⑰
Adjusting the optical 6.2.31 ⑥ ⑱ ④
path length
Confirmation and 6.2.32
adjustment of
⑪ ⑯ ⑨
interference
sensitivity
Replacement of fiber 6.2.33 ⑥
unit
Anterior OCT 6.2.34 ⑨ ③ ⑮ ㉒
Calibration
Galvano mirror 11.2 ③ ⑤ ⑤
cleaning
OCT optical 11.3 ④ ④
Cleaning
• At the adjustment place where numerals are shown, perform the adjustments in the
specified order.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-27
6.2.2 Adjustment of the SLD light intensity at objective lens

Purpose
Adjustment of SLD light quantity due to the degradation of the signal power on B-scan image or the
degradation of the reference value of SLD intensity at objective lens”.
Necessary tools
Tool name Tool No. Image
Power meter OCT-1000-04
Objective Lens Cap for RGB -
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach the Objective Lens Cap for RGB and probe of Power meter to the instrument.
(b) Set the power meter in Zero (wavelength λ = 840 nm).
(c) Turn ON the main unit.
(2) Setting of the pulse width

(a) Setting of “CAN SEND TOOL”
i Launch “CAN SEND TOOL”.
ii Set the following value in CAN SEND TOOL:
Tab Zone Item Value
Galvano ctl Live-Scan data Start X
Galvano ctl Live-Scan data End X Spot(2048 Autofill)
Galvano ctl Live-Scan data Start Y → Set (Single)
Galvano ctl Live-Scan data End Y

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-28
Tab Zone Item Value

Lamp ctl Split LED Split LED OFF
Lamp ctl IR LED IR LED OFF
Lamp ctl SLD SLD Pulse Blinking → Set
Lamp ctl SLD Level Written DAC LEVEL in
Fiber unit side
Lamp ctl SLD ON/OFF LOW → HIGH
• If changing settings of SLD Pulse and Level, set [OFF] in on/off of SLD setting.
• If [POWER CONTRL] is set to “HI” without setting “LOW” , the SLD light source might
be broken. When [POWER CONTRL] is set to “OFF”, set it in the order of ”HI”
→”LOW”→ “OFF”.
Finally set ON or OFF.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-29
(b) Adjustment
i Adjust Pulse Width, so that the objective lens power is within 580 to 600uW
ii Tap [Save] of Pulse Width after adjustment.
(3) Remove the tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-30
6.2.3 Adjustment of the light intensity sensor at objective lens

Purpose
Repair for replacement of the optical sensor (1012464-01 SLD PWR CHK PCB) failure
Repair for the problem with the following message:
• “You may not get high-sensitive OCT image. Proceed?”[300407]
• “SLD light volume exceeds upper limit. Please turn the power switch OFF.”[100112]
Necessary tools
MaestroⅡ_LightAdjustment -
Personal computer (PC) -
LAN cable -
Prepare other necessary tools which are described in the reference section.
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Connects the main body to PC using LAN cable.
(b) Turn ON the main body.
(c) Make [Transmission of the setting data] of LightAdjustment effective.
i Create the shortcut of MaestroⅡ_LightAdjustment.
ii Display the property screen of the shortcut.
iii Add “ / Mode-Send” in the end of the link(Top enter a space), Click Apply（適用(A)）.
Ex.: C:\Users\user1\Desktop\3DOCT-1_LightAdjustment.exe /Mode-Send

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-31
(2) Adjustment of the sensitivity

(a) Execute “MaestroⅡ_LightAdjustment.exe”
(b) When activated, the sensor center position detection starts automatically(Approx. 1 minute).
(c) When the center position detection is completed, the coordinates of the center position and the graph
are displayed.
(d) Click [Gain Adjustment] and perform the auto adjustment to display the light intensity.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-32
• When out of standard, it can be mounted again after confirming that there is no dust in
front of the sensor.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Sensor width for Galvano Y 700 or more
Sensor width for Galvano X 150 or more
(3) Confirmation of the reference value

(a) Click the [CW mode], switching to the PW mode, white display the reference value.
• Click the [Show / Update Stop] to stop each of the display of "SLDLight".
Gain Estimated DN at CW Estimated DN at PW

0(Minimum) About 450～500DN About 150～200DN
1 About 900DN About 400DN

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-33
(4) Transmission of setting data

(a) A confirmation screen is displayed when you Click the [Send Center Position of Sensor].
Confirm that ”X/Y position of sensor” and ”Light Lower”, ”Light Upper”, “Light Upper2” are the
same as the value that is displayed on the adjustment screen and click [OK].
(b) When the following message is displayed, restart the body by clicking the [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-34
(5) Confirmation of transmission data.

(a) Display “Page 9/9” from the main unit setting.
(b) Open the SLD Adjustment tabs and make sure that the values are written to Lower Limit, to Upper Limit, to
Upper Limit2, to Sensor PositionX, and to Sensor PositionY, respectively.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-35
6.2.4 Confirmation of PD current value

Purpose
Confirmation of PD current value of SLD module when “Reference value of SLD intensity at obj. lens” is
getting lower (changed), SLD light source error 01/03 happened.
Necessary tools
Superlum power tool OCT-2000-23
SLD cable 2K OCT-2000-12
Superlum adjustment driver -
Anti-static band -
Procedure
(1) Preparation
• Use anti-static band on your hand. If the operation described in this section was done
without using anti-static band, SLD module might be damaged.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-36
(a) Remove the fiber cover.
(b) Confirm the SLD rated current value and SLD serial number described on the SLD module.
Serial number
SLD rated current value
(c) Turn ON Superlum power tool. Press [Select] to show “SLD Current”.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-37
(d) Adjust SLD adjustment volume to set the displayed value to C.
Ex.) in case that the SLD rated current value is 191mA.
(e) Press [Select] to display “Current Limit”. Set the display value to “SLD rated current value” +1mA.
• Basically, set the current limit value to a current value of +1.0mA. If an error occurs and
the PD current cannot be measured, check the value between +2.0 mA and 5.0 mA. If the
error cannot be measured even if the error is changed, the SLD module may be damaged
or the power supply of the Superlum may be changed.
Ex.) in case that the SLD rated current value is 191mA

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-38
(f) Turn OFF Superlum power tool.

(g) Connect Superlum power tool to “J921” connector on SLD_MODULE_PCB with SLD cable 2K.
• Connect Superlum power tool after turning it OFF. If Superlum power tool is connected
without turning OFF, SLD module may be broken.
(h) Turn ON Superlum power tool. Press [Select] to display “Pd Monitor”.
If “TEC” lamp is lit, the connection has been done properly.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-39
(i) Press [On/Off] twice. SLD lamp will be lit in green, then the current value will be displayed in “Pd
Monitor”.
If SLD lamp is lit in red (or changed from green to red), reconnect SLD cable 2K.
(j) Compare the PD current value with the one at the shipping from maker.
Item Standard Notes
PD current value Within ±5% against the value If out of standard, replace SLD
at the shipping from maker module. (*)
*Carry out the SLD module replacement after taking the repair training (section 6.2.33).
If you have not taken the repair training, ask TOPCON for the repair.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-40
6.2.5 Replacement / Check of Xenon PCB
• Do not adjust VR2. The charge voltage (VR1) and overcharge voltage (VR2) have been
adjusted in the factory.
• Before performing this adjustment, make sure that the cable is connected to the Xe power
supply PCB. (Refer to the following figure.)
Before connecting the cable, make sure that the instrument is not turned on.
• When replace the Xenon lamp, wait more than 5minutes for the discharge of Xenon
Capacitor(Xenon POWER PCB).
Purpose
Repair for the Xe unit failure concerning the error related with Xe unit.
Necessary tools
Object holder OCT-1-01
Digital voltmeter or Digital multi meter -
Xe Light intensity power meter TRC-NW400-02
Procedure
(1) Replacement of Xenon lamp(XE_FLASH_UNIT_M2)
(a) Remove the lamp house cover, the head cover, the middle cover, and the communication cover, the
base cover. (  section 6.1.4~6.1.6)
(b) Remove the Xenon lamp connector.
(c) Loosen two screws using the flat head screw driver and Remove the Xenon lamp after slide to left.
(d) Attach the Xenon lamp for replacement.
(c)Loosen the screw and Remove
the Xenon lamp after slide to left
(b)Remove the connector

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-41
(2) Replacement of Xenon POWER PCB

(a) Remove the two screws and remove the Line CCD heat sink.
heat sink
(b) Remove two connectors, four screws and two spacers on Xenon POWER PCB.(  section 6.1.38)
(c) Remove the Xenon POWER PCB.
(d) Attach Xenon POWER PCB for replacement (Do not forget to assemble the protection cover as well).
(e) Assemble the heat sink of Line CCD .
(f) Attach the base cover, the communication cover, the middle cover, the head cover, and lamp house
cover.
1024631-01
Xenon_CBL_UNIT
_M2 1022217-01
Xenon_POW_CABLE

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-42
(3) Confirmation after changing xenon unit

(a) Turn on the instrument.
(b) The charge capacitor is charged. After charging is completed, measure the voltage between R19-1
(capacitor side) and 3 pin of CN2 (GND) on Xe_POW-PCB3 (40496 63200) with a digital multimeter.
Check if the measured value is approximately 280V.
*The voltage depends on Xe unit. Ask TOPCON about the exact voltage at the shipment.
Connect the [-] probe of the digital
multimeter to pin #3 of CN2.
VR1
Connect the [+] probe of the

digital multimeter to R19-1 VR2
(capacitor side).
(4) Confirmation of photographing light quantity

(a) Attach the front object holder and the power meter head to the main body.
Power meter head

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-43
(b) Setting of power meter

i Turn on the power meter and press the MENU button. When "ENERGY" appears on the screen, press
the button (the leftmost Δ button) beneath it (Figure A).
ii Press the button just below "RANGE" (the rightmost button) (Figure B).
iii As the screen changes to the screen C shown below, move the cursor to "2.00 mJ" and press "EXIT".
If the display in the figure below is displayed, the setting of the power meter is completed.
Figure A Figure B Figure C
Push
Push
Figure D

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-44
(c) Setting the main unit

i Turn on the power of the main unit.
ii
Activate CAN SEND TOOL and make the following settings.
Tab Zone Item Value
Motor Ctl 1/2 Small Pupil - Normal
Motor Ctl 1/2 Split IN/OUT - OUT
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern 0: External
LCD Setting
Lamp ctl Split LED - OFF
Lamp ctl IR LED - OFF
Lamp ctl SLD ON/OFF OFF

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-45
(d) Measurement
i Select "CAN SEND TOOL" - "Lamp Ctl" - "Xe" - "Level" - "0: 4.0" and tap [Set].
ii Tap "Flash" - [Set] to make Xe emit light and confirm that the light intensity is within the standards
shown in the table below.
iii Similarly change "Level" to "-4", "-2", "+ 2", "+ 4" to cause Xe to emit light and confirm that each is
within the standard.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
-4: 2.0 A × 0.5±15% Let A be the measured value of
-2: 2.9 A × 0.7±15% “0: 4.0”
0: 4.0 A: 0.37mJ±30%
+2: 5.7 A × 1.4±15%
+4: 8.1 A × 2.0±15%

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-46
6.2.6 Adjustment of the observation light intensity

Purpose
Replacement and adjustment of IR LED or aperture selector unit (KOUGEN-MODULE(1024779-01).
After this adjustment, confirm the blink detection.
Necessary tools
Objective lens cap for RGB -
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Put the objective lens cap onto the objective lens in the main body.
(b) Turn ON the main body.
(c) Activate CAN SEND TOOL and make the following settings.
Tab Zone Item Value

Motor Ctl 1/2 TRC Focus Move 0D
Motor Ctl 1/2 Split Unit Move 0D
Motor Ctl 1/2 Split IN /OUT Split IN / OUT OUT
Motor Ctl 1/2 Small Pupil Small Pupil Normal
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern 0:External → Set
LCD Setting
Lamp Ctl Split LED - OFF
Lamp Ctl IR LED - OFF
Lamp Ctl Anterior Observation LED - OFF
Lamp Ctl SLD ON / OFF OFF

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-47
(d) Setting of the power meter

i Set the power meter as shown in the figure below: “Auto mode”, “wavelength 770nm”, “W”.
ii Shield the sensor, to set the Zero correction.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-48
iii Attach the probe of the power meter to the objective lens cap.
(2) Light intensity adjustment

(a) Adjustment of the light intensity level 3
i Select [Lamp Ctl] tab in CAN SEND TOOL.
ii Tap [Set] → [ON] of Level 3 in the IR LED column.
iii Adjust the value of Level 3 so that the measured value of the power meter falls within the range of the
standard, and tap [Set].
Standard
Item Standard Note
Observation light intensity(Level 3) 155±10 μw Wait about 10 minutes to
measure before LED light
stabilizes.
(b) Confirm the measured value(Level 1,2,4) as referring to the Observation light intensity setting same as
(a).
Observation light intensity 1 2 3 4
Measured value (µW) 100±10 120±10 155±10 210±10
(c) After confirming each value are adjusted in the previous procedure, Tap the [Save].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-49
6.2.7 Adjustment of blink detection

Purpose
Repair for the failure of blink detection, or replacement of blink detection unit (MABATAKI-KENCHI-
MODULE (1024780-01)) or (TRC_M2-PCB UNIT (1022959-01)).
This adjustment is performed after the observation light intensity adjustment ( section 6.2.6).
Necessary tools
Blink detection adjustment tool (A) OCT-1-43
Blink detection adjustment tool (B) OCT-1-58
Blink detection check tool OCT-2000-24
PC -
LAN cable -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-50
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Turn on the main body.
(b) Launch CAN SEND TOOL.
(c) Set as follows.
Tab Zone Item Value
Motor Ctl 1/2 Split IN / OUT - OUT
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation LCD Setting Patern 0:External →
Set
Lamp Ctl SLD ON/OFF OFF
Lamp Ctl IR LED Level3 Set
Blink Ctl Blink Adjustment IR Adjustment Set *1
Blink Ctl Blink Adjustment Setting Read →
“Gain 255”
→ Save *2
*1. Confirm that "OK" is displayed in the Result field.

* 2. Confirm that the Gain field is "255" and tap [Save].
If it is not "255", enter "255".
(d) Looking through the objective lens, check the "retreat of the split bar", "SLD Off", "IR LED Off" and
"internal fixation Off".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-51

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-52

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-53
(2) Adjustment
(a) Eyelid opening adjustment
i Attach the Blink detection adjustment tool (A) and the Object holder onto the objective lens.
ii Adjust "Offset" and set the value of "Blink Monitor" to be within 240 DN ± 35 DN.
• The value of "Blink Monitor" is displayed by tapping [ON].
Standard
Item Standard Note
Eyelid Opening 240DN±35DN Adjust by Offset Value.
Adjust the DN value to
the lowest value within
the range of the standard.
• Relationship between Offset setting and adjustment value.

Offset setting 0(min) ＜――――＞ 255(max)
Sensor adjustment value small ＜――――＞ large

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-54
(b) Eyelid closure adjustment

i Attach the Blink detection adjustment tool (B).
ii Adjust "Gain" and set the value of "Blink Monitor" to be 820DN -0DN/+1910DN.
• The value of "Blink Monitor" is displayed by tapping [ON].
• Adjust so that it approaches 820 DN as much as possible at 1910DN or less.
Standard
Item Standard Note
Eyelid Closure 820DN -0DN/+1910DN Adjust by Gain value
Make it as close as possible to 820
DN between 820 and 1910 DN.
• Relationship between gain setting and adjustment value.

Gain setting 255(min) ＜――――＞ 0(max)
Sensor adjustment value small ＜――――＞ large

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-55
(c) Eyelid Opening/Closure confirmation

i Attach the Blink detection adjustment tool (A)
ii Check the value of the eyelid opening adjustment. If it is within the standard, adjustment is finished.
If out of the standard, carry out the Opening adjustment and Closure adjustment again.
Repeat, until the adjustment is within the standard.
iii Change the Level of the IR LED and confirm that the value of "Blink Monitor" at opening / closing
eyelids satisfies the following formula.
Level1 ＜ Level2 ＜ Level3 ＜ Level4
iv After the adjustment is completed, restart the main unit.

v Check the "LED / blink detection" - "Blink detection Gain" and "Blink detection Offset" on page 8 of
the tool mode and confirm that the adjustment value is saved.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-56
(d) Check the operation of blink detection.

i Remove the Blink detection adjustment tool and attach the Blink detection check tool.
ii Set the shutter of Blink detection check tool to open position.
iii On the menu screen tap [SET UP].
iv Select [Fundus Photo] tab, and set [Normal] of “Blink detection level” on page2.
v Connect the main unit and the PC with the LAN cable.
vi Startup “IMAGEnet6”.
vii Click [Fundus Photo].

viii Tap [Advance] - [Manual].
ix Click [Capture Start].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-57
x Tap the bottom part on “Camera 1” and “Camera 2” screen to display pupil mark.
xi Tap the [Capture Start] button.
Pupil mark
xii Tap [Capture start], then close the shutter of the blink detection confirmation tool within 1 second, and
confirm that the following message is displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-58
6.2.8 Adjustment of the photography observation camera

Purpose
Adjustment / Repair after replacement with Shift of mask position or Basler camera issue (internal PCB
issue in color camera (COLOR_CAMERA_USB3(1022301-01), pixel issue)
Necessary tools
Focusing tool OCT-1-09

(Long type)
Split focusing schematic eye (0D) OCT-1-10
Galvano OCT optical axis adjustment check tool OCT-1-16
ISO Model Eye TRC-NW400-04
Personal Computer (PC) -
USB3.0 Extension cable -
pylon Viewer -
CameraPositionAdjust -
(pylon Viewer must be installed.)
Torque driver(18cN・m) -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-59
Procedure
(1) Preparation
Install Basler Camera and Personal Computer System settings.
(a) Pylon viewer installation procedure
• Install on PC with USB 3.0 port.
i Launch Pylon viewer installer.
ii Check "I agree to the pylon Terms & Conditions" and click "Next".
iii Select "Camera User" and click "Next".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-60
iv Select "USB" and click "Next".
v Select an arbitrary folder and click "Next".
vi Click [Install].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-61
vii The installation begins. Wait for several minutes to complete.
viii Click [Close].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-62
(b) Flip up of Holder Plate(OCT_IMG-BOARD)

i Remove the LAN cable, camera link cable, and two screws.
• Use torque driver (18 cN･m) when attaching camera link cable to OCT_IMG - BOARD.
ii Loosen the screws on both upper sides and flip the Holder Plate (OCT_IMG - BOARD) about 90
degrees.
IMG_B_POW_CABLE
Loosen the screws. There is a latch on the
There is a latch on the back back side
side of the LAN cable.
Remove the screws.(Two)
Loosen the screws on both sides

and remove the camera link cable.
※ Remove the fixing screws.
iii Adjust the angle and depth of the sheet metal so that IMG_B_POW_CABLE can be connected to
OCT_IMG_BOARD.
iv Tighten the upper and lower screws and fix the sheet metal.
• If it is forcibly connected, the board / cable may be damaged or broken.
• IMG_B_POW_CABLE may touch to the edges of the metal plate depending on the
position of the sheet metal jumping up. As a result, there is a possibility of damaging the
coating of the cable, so attach the insulating tape to the contacting part.
• Find the position where the sheet metal is the largest open.
Tighten and fix the screws on

both sides of the upper part.
Attach the insulating tape so that the edge

of the metal plate and the edge of the cable
do not touch each other.
Insert the connector

straight
Flip up.
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-63

• Connect the Basler cameras and PCs with the main unit powered on.
• Be careful not to touch the connection between the USB extension cable and the Baslar
camera. (Protect the metal part of the USB cable by winding an insulator such as an air
cap)
(d) Connecting Basler cameras and PCs

Connect the Baslar cameras and PCs using USB3. 0 extension cables.
Attention to short
Disconnect the USB cable of the
Basler cameras connected to the GPU
board. Connect the USB cable to the
PC using the USB3. 0 extension cable.
Objective lens
front holder
(e) Attach Object holder.

Tighten the screw of Object holder from upper right position observing the front side. Tighten the four
screws firmly.
(2) Setting of the main unit

(a) Start up the CAN SEND TOOL.
(b) Then carry out the following setting.
Tab Zone Item Value
Motor Ctl 1/2 Visibility Adjuust Move 0D
Lamp Ctl IR LED - ON
Lamp Ctl IR LED Brightness Level4 → Set *1
Lamp Ctl Xe Level 1:0.5 → Set
* 1. If the live image is dark, change the value and tap [Set].
(Do not tap [Save])

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-64

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-65
(3) Mask position and focus adjustment

(a) Attach ISO Model Eye.
ISO Model Eye
(b) Start CameraPositionAdjust.
(c) Click [LIVE START]. Select full screen mode.
• Restart CameraPositionAdjust if the image becomes dark while not in use during use.
(d) Adjust mask position to center using the three screws CR3×8S+FW_3BZn.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-66
(e) Focus adjustment

i Loosen 6SU3x4S3BZn with a hex and insert the focus adjustment tool.
Peel off black tape
Loosen 6 SU3x4S3BZn
Focusing tool
ii Click [ZOOM] to focus on 50 images.

• When confirming the focus position, adjust the magnification so that the resolving power
chart of the ISO model eye can be easily checked.
Use “50” pattern for focus

tentative adjustment.
(f) After focusing, fix the 6SU3x4S3BZn.

(g) Check dust and dirt in the image.
Check if there is any harmful dust or dirt on the image of ISO Model Eye, which will affect the
operation. Rotate Cross stripes compensation test eye to find the position of the dust or dirt. If it still
remains at the same position during the rotation, it is on the surface of optics. Clean it carefully.
If there is a shadow in the image, rotate ISO Model Eye

and take a shot. If it still remains at the same position, it
is dust. Clean half mirror of internal fixation unit or
CCD surface of camera.
(h) Remove ISO Model Eye.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-67
(4) Camera inclination and position adjustment

(a) Attach the galvano OCT optical axis adjustment check tool removing the top part of the tool.
※Remove the top Parts
Galvano OCT optical axis

adjustment check tool
(b) Loosen the two screws 6SU3×4S3BZn for coarse camera inclination adjustment. Adjust camera
inclination and position in the green frame.
(c) After adjustment, apply the TA lock. Adjustment frame
3 pcs of CR3×8S+FW_3BZn A
Center position
• Camera inclination: Galvano scale should
be located between reference lines for Reference lines
inclination. for inclination
• Camera position: Adjust camera position D
referring to the adjustment frame (green
circle).
• The distance between the mask position C
and the edge of the screen must be equal
the vertical and horizontal positions.
A≒B、C≒D
How to access the upper screw (6SV3 × 4S3BZn)
② Insert the driver from

the hole in the figure.
① Remove the screw

and remove the cover.
Coarse camera
inclination adjustment
CR3X8S+FW_3BZn
6SV3X4S 3BZn Apply screw locking
TA lock
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-68
(5) Confirmation of optical axis error

(a) Confirm the error of the optical axis for the photography camera.
i Tap [OUT] in “TRC IN/OUT” frame.
(IR filter is removed)
ii Click [ZOOM].
iii Confirm the error between the galvano scale and green line.
Read the X, Y error between the
galvano scale and green line
(0.05mm / division).
Error =√(X2+Y2)
Item Standard Check Points

Difference of Within φ0.3mm Check the difference of Galvano scale and
Capture Optical axis (within 3 divisions) Green Line in tool.
If it is out of the standard, carry out step (4)
again.
(b) Confirm the error of the optical axis.

i Tap [IN] in “TRC IN/OUT” frame of [Motor Control ½] tab.
(IR filter enters)
ii
Confirm the error between the galvano scale and green line.
Item Standard Check Points
Difference of Within φ0.3mm Check the difference of Galvano scale and
Observation Optical axis (within 3 divisions) Green Line in tool.
If it is out of the standard, carry out step (4) and
(5) (a) again.
(c) Remove the Galvano-OCT Optical Alignment Check Tool and terminate the CameraPositionAdjust.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-69
(6) Setting up pylon Viewer

(a) Double click “pylon Viewer” icon on desktop.
(b) When the communication is established between Basler and PC, double click “Basler ac......”.
If the communication is not established, confirm the connection between Basler and PC.
(c) Confirm Basler information.
(d) Select "Guru" if the User Level is Beginner or Expert.
(e) Open “Acquisition Controls” clicking “(+)”.
(f) Set “Trigger mode” to ON. Screen will be changed to Live image.
(g) Click “Continuous Shot”.
(h) Set “FeatureSets” to “Full”.
Click “Continuous Shot”
Click “Basler ac ….........”
Open “Acquisition Controls”
Set “Trigger mode” to ON.
Set “FeatureSets” to “Full”.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-70
(7) Focus adjustment and confirmation

(a) Take a shot tapping [Capture] in “Fundus Capture”.
Tap the「Motor Ctl 1/2」 - 「Fundus Capture」 - [Capture].
(b) Confirm if the focus is adjusted to center taking a shot changing the focus about ±50DN from 0DN in
“TRC Focus”. Save the image selecting “Save image”  “file name : OD”.
If the adjustment is not good, repeat the adjustment from step (b).
Change the focus about ±50DN.
Tap to take a shot.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-71
(8) Confirmation of the photography image

(a) Confirm the center error on the monitor.
Item Standard Remarks
Center error |A-B|=1mm Measure the tool monitor directly.
|C-D|=2mm If the camera does not meet the standard, adjust the camera
position again.
A Standard:
|A-B|=1mm
|C-D|=2mm
C D
• (Reference) How to check the angle of view

Read the upper and lower vertical scale of ISO Model Eye. Calculate the angle of view
using the following formula.
Item Reference value Remarks
Angle 45°±5% (42.75 ~ 47.25°) angle of view = (Rupper + Rlower+0.4)× 1.025
Read the upper and lower vertical scale

angle of view = (Rupper + Rlower+0.4）× 1.025

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-72
(b) Confirm the fundus image resolving power.

Fundus image resolution 50 lines / mm or more (center) -
40 lines / mm or more (r/2)
25 lines / mm or more (r)
25 lines / mm or more (r)
40 lines / mm or more (r/2)
50 lines / mm or more (center)
(c) Check dust and dirt in the image.

Check if there is any harmful dust or dirt on the image of ISO Model Eye, which will affect the
operation. Rotate Cross stripes compensation test eye to find the position of the dust or dirt. If it still
remains at the same position during the rotation, it is on the surface of optics. Clean it carefully.
If there is a shadow in the image, rotate ISO Model Eye

and take a shot. If it still remains at the same position, it
is dust. Clean half mirror of internal fixation unit or
CCD surface of camera.
(d) Remove ISO Model Eye.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-73
6.2.9 Adjustment of white balance

Purpose
Adjustment of Color intensity or after replacement of Basler camera for repair
• "Section 6.2.8 Adjustment of the photography observation camera " has been completed
before this adjustment.
Necessary Tools
WB compensation tool OCT-1-40
LAN cable -
MaestroⅡ_AdjustBaslerCamera -
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach the Object holder to the WB (White Balance) compensation tool.
(b) Connect the main unit with the PC using the LAN cable.
(c) Turn on the main unit.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-74
(d) Execute “AdjustBaslerCamera.exe”.
(e) Make sure "Maestro II" is selected.
(f) Tap [Fundus Photo] on the main unit.
(g) Tap [Advance]-[Focus]-[-] in capture monitor. Then move “▼” focus indicator bar mark to around -10
and adjust the focus.
• Check that the diopter correction lens switch button is set to "0".
Focus
Check the diopter

correction lens "0"
Focus indicator bar
Advance

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-75
(2) Adjustment of the Macbeth chart

(a) RGB range adjustment
i Click [Capture] in “AdjustBaslerCamera”, the Macbeth chart is displayed .
*If the chart is oblique, adjust the WB compensation tool so that its direction will be the same as the
vertical direction of the screen as in the figure below.
ii Set the RGB value range used for WB adjustment. Set a point near the center of white, the leftmost one,
to within the range of the 120×120 analysis frame. It must not stick out from the white range.
1） Change the value of [RGB values in the specified range] to move the position of the analysis frame
(yellow).
※Move the analysis frame (yellow) to the vicinity of the center of the white chart.
2） Set the difference between the right and left and the top and bottom of the [RGB values in the
specified range] to 120.
※Setting the difference between the right, left, and top and bottom to 120 makes the analysis frame
(yellow) 120×120 squares in size.
*Set the position of the analysis frame so that it does not protrude from the white chart.
iii Click [Set range]
1)Change the values from left to right, up

and down, and move the analysis frame.
2)Set the difference between left, right, and up and down

to 120.
(For example)
Left 870 ← Difference 120 → Right 990
Top 670 ← Difference 120 → Bottom 790
120
120
Specification range frame

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-76
iv Tap [Shoot with adjustment value]. Then capture the image.

v The RGB value of the range specified part is displayed as "calculated value".
• Change "Adjustment value" in "Basler camera white balance correction" column so that "calculated
value" becomes ± 2 with respect to "target value", tap "Shoot with adjustment value" and repeat
shooting
At this time, confirm that each adjustment value of RGB is within the following range. If it is out of
range, respond by changing the flash level in the "Fundus photography" tab page 2 on the main unit
setting screen.
• Flash level is set 4.0Ws (default) which is high quality of the photograpy light intensity
basically. In case the RGB adjustment value is not standard value, change the flash level to
make the adjustment value is in the standard value.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
RGB adjustment value R: 192±31 -
G: 96±9
B: 207±19
Change "adjustment
value" and shoot.
Set "calculated place" to

± 2 with respect to
"target value".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-77
(b) Confirmation of R value of "Cyan"
• Do not change the RGB adjustment value when checking the Cyan chart.
i Adjust "Range Setting" to "Cyan" and confirm the R value of "Cyan".

• As in (a) - (ii), change the value of [Range of RGB values], and set the position and size of the analysis
frame (yellow).
ii After completing the setting, click [Setting range].
iii Tap [Capture with Adjustment Value] to shoot.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
R value of "Cyan" R: 80 or more -
*If it is less than 80, readjust from (2).
Do not change "adjustment value"
"Cyan" chart
Analysis frame

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-78
(3) Storage of the adjusted value

(a) Click [SAVE] in AdjustBaslerCamera, save the RGB value of “OCT value” to the main unit.
(b) When the dialog “Is adjustment parameter set up?” is displayed, click “Yes”. Then the dialog “Write of
adjustment parameter was completed.” appears. Click “OK” and close Adjust Basler Camera.exe. Then
turn off the power of the main unit.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-79
6.2.10 Stereoscopic camera orientation

Purpose
Repair for the anterior eye observation camera (47011 81000 ANT OBS CAMERA) due to the
malfunction or replacement.
Necessary Tools
OCT pupil position check tool OCT-1-17
Stereo matching adjustment B tool OCT-1-31

Including calcXYZ.csv in USB-memory
(Use the same serial number as OCT-1-34)
Anterior CCD filter OCT-1-33
Stereo matching check tool OCT-1-34

(Use the same serial number as OCT-1-31)
Power supply DC-700 OCT-1-50
Tamron M118FM25 OCT-1-53
Video to USB2.0 converter DFG/USB2pro OCT-1-55
CPC3440-02 cable OCT-1-56

BNC-BNC 2m cable
USB cable: A-B type OCT-1-57
Binocular Test Eye OCT-1-65
SONY XC-EI50/2 40423 68000

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-80
Converter Connector of BNC Jack to RCA pin -

(For OCT-1-55)
Precise hex wrench -
Personal Computer (PC) with software for orientation analysis -

installed
LAN cable -
Stereo Camera Measuring Tool(ver1.20 or later) -

Prepare setting files "Rism5.cmr" and "TargetSheet2.gcp"
3DOCT-1_SendAlignmentParameter.exe -
(for the data transfer application software)
IC Capture -
Procedures
(1) Analysis of orientation
(a) Preparation
• When you transfer calcXYZ.csv stored in the tool attached USB memory and the setting
file "Rism5.cmr" "TargetSheet2.gcp" etc. to the PC, prepare in advance.
i Attach “Stereo matching adjustment B tool” for the orientation work to the objective lens part of the
main unit. At this time, it is necessary to detach the external board for peripheral fixation (on the circle)
and the rubber cap.
Insert the pin into the upper part of the objective lens properly and fix it securely with the fixing screw
so that there will be no deviation. Be careful because the precision will deteriorate, if orientation work is
done with deviation in the tool.
ii Attach the anterior segment CCD filter to each of the left and right stereo cameras.
Insert the fixing pin

firmly.
Four fixing screws
Attach Anterior
CCD ,Stereo camera filter
Push and fix

firmly
• The direction of the stereo camera is defined by the right camera when viewed from the
examiner's side, and the left camera when viewed from the left side..
• If the tool for orientation work is not attached in the proper position, the measurement
accuracy will be affected.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-81
iii Connect the main unit to the PC (with the tool software installed) using the LAN cable.
iv Execute QMcalib.exe in StereoCameraMeasuringTool (ver1.2.0 or later).
v Click the [New Project]. While the dialog of project creation is displayed in the software for orientation
analysis, make sure that the live video of the left and right cameras is displayed on the main unit screen.
Do not click [OK]

at this point.
(b) Adjustment and Fixture of Focus Position

i Adjust by turning the lens so that the point near the target of the diamond on the main unit comes to a
clearly visible position.
Turn the lens to

adjust the focus.
ii Secure with the set screw at the bottom of the lens, make sure the lens does not move and apply TA lock.
Switch the display of the image, and perform it on both the right and left lenses.
*Please be aware that if the lens and the camera move after fixing the lens, the measurement accuracy
will go wrong.
Switch to the right camera Switch to the left camera

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-82
(c) Analysis and store of the stereo image for orientation

i In the "New Project" dialog, click [OK]. (If you click [OK], a project folder is created in the specified
directory and the capture images of Right Camera and Left Camera are saved.)
ii Click the Blue icon.
iii Click "load" of "Left image cmr" and "Right image cmr" respectively, specify "Rism5.cmr" file, and
click "Save".
iv Click "load" of "gcp", specify "TargetSheet2.gcp" file, and click "Save".Sapo9899
v Click the [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-83
vi Analysis processing is started automatically by pressing the [Full Automatic Calibration].
Full Automatic Calibration
vii When the analysis is completed, the result is displayed. Confirm that "Auto Detect Points" is "50/57" or
higher and "Auto Calib Result" is "OK".
• If "Auto Calib Result" is "NG" or "Auto Detect Points" is less than 50, the process starts
again from acquiring images (step (b)).
• Even if "OK" is displayed in "Auto Calib Result", readjustment is required if "Auto Detect
Points" is not "50/57" or more (step (b)).
viii Click [OK].
ix Check that the [Camera Calibration Determination] dialog box is displayed and OK is displayed in the
[Determination] column, and click [OK].In the case of NG, start again from step (b).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-84
x Close the QMcalib.exe

xi Remove the stereo matching adjustment tool B and the anterior segment CCD filter.
(Reference) Completion of Analysis Result File

If the above-mentioned analysis is done, a result file (text) will be created. The content will be as the
sample shown below. The file name is ___.EXT so that data can be transferred to the main unit using
the data transfer software later.
The following parameters in the main unit application are calculated.

Camera position 〈Left〉: X,Y,Z,Omega,Phi,Kappa
Camera position 〈Right〉: X,Y,Z,Omega,Phi,Kappa
* The data does not always match the following figure data.
Camera position
coordinate
X, Y, Z
Camera rotation
angle
Omega, Phi, Kappa
Left camera position parameter - Output Left camera position parameter - Output
contents contents

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-85
(2) Measurement of the optics error

When the fundus image in auto alignment process is taken, it is required to move the image without the flare
to the position where it is allowed to be taken. Due to the reason, measure the error of the pupil aperture
(vertical and horizontal direction) and the error of the cornea aperture or the iris aperture (back and forward
direction) then input them to the processing system.
(a) Launch “CAN SEND TOOL”.

(b) Measure the error of the pupil aperture (vertical and horizontal direction). (TargetPositionOffset: X,Y)
i Attach Object holder and the pupil positon check tool to the objective lens unit.
ii Launch “IC capture”.
iii Set “CAN SEND TOOL” as shown below.
Tab Zone Item Value
Motor Ctl 1/2 Visibility Adjust Move 0D
Motor Ctl 1/2 Small Pupil - Normal
Lamp Ctl Split LED Split LED OFF
Lamp Ctl IR LED IR LED OFF
Lamp Ctl SLD ON/OFF Low → OFF
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Bright 10:100% → Set
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern 7:All Points Light → Set
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Blink OFF
LCD Setting

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-86
iv The internal fixation light at the aperture position will be observed like a circular form. Read the error of
X direction and Y direction using the scale of the check tool. Referring to the drawing below, read the
scale at the edge of the circular form of the internal fixation light. Decide the adjustment direction and
quantitiy.
v One division corresponds to 100µm. Convert the result to the unit of “µm”. Record the value for the
further step.
• The downward direction of the Y axis is the + direction.
vi Transfer the value to the application software on the main body in step (3).
(→the main body, auto alignment, X / Y value in “TargetPositionOffset” ）
Read the correction value

-X scale reading: 3 +X scale reading: 5
to set the internal fixation
to the center of the scale
-Y scale reading: 3
Conversion data (Y):
-100µm
X(+) direction
+Y scale reading: 5
Conversion data (X):

Y(+) direction -100µm
e.g.) In the case of the above figure, since it is necessary to move -100 μm in the X direction and -
100 μm in the Y direction in order to make the center of the fixation light and the center of the
scale coincide with each other, the target position offset X is "-100 "And Target Position Offset Y
is" -100 ".
(c) Measurement with Difference of Cornea aperture and Iris aperture (TargetPositionOffset: Z)
Note the values of "Auto Alignment2"-"Target Position Offset Z" on the page 9 of tool mode.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-87
(3) Analysis Result Data Transfer

This section describes how to transfer the analyzed orientation result data, etc. to the main unit software
using the data transfer application software (3DOCT-1_SendAlignmentParameter.exe).
(a) Software Startup, 3DOCT-1_SendAlignmentParameter

i Click Camera position <Left > - [Reference…] to select the.EXT file from the Left cameras and click
[Open].
ii The specified file is displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-88
iii As in the previous step, specify Camera position <Right > (.EXT file) and Target position (.csv) (.csv
file) to ensure that the file is displayed.
• Target position (.csv) specifies the stereo-matching-adjustment-B tool and the set of
calcXYZ.csv files that you used to correction.
iv Enter the values of X, Y measured in (2)-(b) and Z checked in (2)-(c) in "Target position Offset".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-89
(b) Comfirmation of Value Setting and Data Transmission

After file specification and data input, confirm the displayed data to transmit and, if there are no
abnormalities, press the [Send] button. Confirm in the dialog again, and send the data to complete this
step.
If there are no abnormal

values, press the [Send]
button. Confirm again and
write data to ROM.
Confirm again and the data will be sent

if you press [Yes].
If data is sent without any problems, the above

message will be displayed.
(c) Data Confirmation in Main Unit

Confirm whether the contents of the data sent by the data transmission software is written in the main
unit, by pressing the “SetUp” icon in the main unit software, display the contents of page 8, and
checking the data in the tabs “AutoAlighment1” and “AutoAlighment2”. (*Though the size of data has
become 1000 times larger, it is normal.)
• Note that The transferred data is reflected when the main unit is restarted.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-90
(4) Confirm of Auto Alignment movement

Confirm Capture and Auto Alignment movement at the saved orientation data.
(a) Reboot up the instrument after transfer the orientation data in step (3).
Then update the sending data
(b) Launch IMAGEnet6.
(c) Enter the tool mode and make the following settings.
i Set[Macula]of fixation position in [Fundus].
ii Tap [ON] at [Auto Alignment] tab in Page 5.
iii Tap [ON] at [Auto Focus] tab in Page 5.
iv Tap [OK].
(d) Tap [Fundus Photo].
(e) Attach tool filter(OCT-1-33) in front of Anterior observation camera on left and right or attach the main
cover, front cover and filter, etc.
(f) Capture Left and Right.
No problem to movement that clear fundus image within mask as below capture images.
Attach Tool filter or

front cover (sample)
Ex) Left Fundus Image Ex) Right Fundus Image

sample sample

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-91
(5) Automatic Alignment Accuracy Check

Confirm the accuracy of automatic alignment.
(a) Detach the external board for peripheral fixation (on the circle) and confirm that the rubber cap is
removed.
(b) Attach the accuracy check tool for automatic alignment to the objective lens of the main unit. Insert the
pin into the upper part of the objective lens properly, insert the tool, and fix it securely with the fixing
screw so that there will be no deviation. Also attach the tool filter to the camera lens.
Insert the fixing pin properly
Attach the tool filter
Four points shall be fixed
Insert firmly to fix
* If the accuracy check tool is not attached in the proper position, the measurement accuracy will be
affected.
(c) Enter the tool mode and make the following settings.
i Enter “scan for Fundus shooting” in the Fundus shooting mode, set internal fixation to “Macula”.
ii Turn on the Auto Alignment Adjust in page 9/9 Adjustment mode to enable the function.
iii Tap [OK],then close Serviceman mode.
(d) Confirm that the reading value of Z direction in micrometer is set to the standard value shown on the
tool.
(e) Tap [Fundus Photo].
(f) By tapping [Capture start], you will tap the pupil part manually to specify the screen, so tap the pupil
part of the model eye that appears in each image to the left and right, and tap [Capture start].
(g) When the pupil portion of the model is detected, the XYZ figure (value of the difference from the target
position) will be displayed at the bottom left of the IR observation screen.
(h) Confirm that the value of XYZ displayed in step (g) is within the value of X and Y: 0.3 mm and the
value of Z is within 0.1 mm.
(i) After confirmation, set Auto Alignment Adjust to OFF in page 9/9 Adjustment mode set in SetUp.
(j) If out of standard in step (11) -(i), proceed as follows.
i Remove the tool once and attach it again. Then repeat the same procedure. If still out of standard, carry
out next step ii.
ii Carry out “orientation work” again. Confirm the detected points in orientation target image. Adjust focus
position rotating the focusing lens to focus the target ,which was (were) not detected.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-92
6.2.11 Adjustment of TRC Focus

Purpose
Focus adjustment after replacing the Photography camera (Basler camera : COLOR_CAMERA
(1022301-01)) and SPLIT-MODULE (1024778-01)
The following procedures are described in this section.

• Preparation
• Potentiometer check / adjustment at TRC focus 0D position
• Potentiometer check / adjustment at TRC focus -10D position
• Potentiometer check / adjustment at TRC focus +10D position
Necessary Tools
Split focusing test eye (+10D/0D/-10D) OCT-1-10
USB 3.0 extension cable -
pylon Viewer -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-93
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Turn on the main unit.
(b) Connect the Basler camera and the PC with a USB 3.0 extension cable.
Unplug the USB cable of the

Basler camera connected to the
GPU board and connect it to
the PC using the USB 3.0
extension cable.
(c) Execute “ pylon Viewer.exe”.

(d) Click “Basler ac ….”
(e) Click “(▶)” to open the information in “Acquisition Controls”.
(f) Set “Trigger Mode” to “ON”.
(g) Click “Continuous Shot”.
Click “Continuous Shot”.
Click “Basler ac …”
Open “Acquisition Controls”
Set “Trigger Mode” to ON.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-94
(2) Confirmation and adjustment of the potentiometer in 0D position of split focus

(a) Attach the split focusing test eye of 0D.
Attach the split focusing test eye.
Attach “0D” in the

tip of the tool.
(b) Execute “CAN SEND TOOL”.

(c) Tap [0D] of TRC-OCT Focus column in Motor Ctrl 1/2 tab on CAN SEND TOOL.
(d) Select “13 : 4.0” in “Xe” frame. Then tap [Set].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-95
(e) Move “TRC Focus” to around “0” position. (About 1500 in “CAN SEND TOOL”）
(f) Tap the [Capture] button in “Fundus Capture” frame in “Motor Ctl” to capture the image.
(g) Confirm the image clear resolution up to chart “I”.
• If the resolution is not good, repeat steps (e) ~ (f) to find the suitable focus position.
• Focus precisely moving around “20” in “CAN SEND TOOL”.
• When confirming the focus position, please adjust the magnification on the pylon
viewer to about 300% so that the resolving power chart of the split focusing test eye can
be seen clearly.
(h) Tap [Get] in “Position” to show the current sensor position.

(i) Tap the [0D] button in “Correction Save” frame in “TRC Focus”, store the 0D sensor position.
(j) Tap [-10D] in “TRC-OCT Focus” “Move” frame and then [0D] in “TRC Focus” “Move” frame and
check if the sensor position goes to the memorized position.
(k) Remove the split focusing test eye of 0D.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-96
(e) Move “TRC Focus” to around 1500.
(h) Tap “Get” to show the current sensor position.
(i) Tap “0D” to store it.
(3) Confirmation and adjustment of the potentiometer in -10D position of split focus
(a) Attach the split focusing test eye of -10D.
Attach “-10D” in
the tip of the tool.
(b) Tap [-10D] of TRC-OCT Focus column in Motor Ctrl 1/2 tab.
(c) Move “TRC Focus” to around “-10D” position. (About 860 in “CAN SEND TOOL”)
(d) Tap the [Capture] button in “Fundus Capture” frame in “Motor Ctl 1/2” to capture the image.
(e) Confirm the image clear resolution up to chart “G”.
• If the resolution is not good, repeat steps (c) ~ (d) to find the suitable focus position.
• When confirming the focus position, please adjust the magnification on the pylon
viewer to about 300% so that the resolving power chart of the split focusing test eye can
be seen clearly.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-97
(f) Tap [Get] in “Position” to show the current sensor position.

(g) Tap the [-10D] button in the “Correction Save” frame in “TRC Focus”, store the -10D sensor position.
(h) Tap [+10D] in “TRC-OCT Focus” “Move” frame and then [-10D] in “TRC Focus” “Move” frame and
(i) Remove the split focusing test eye of -10D.
(c) Move “TRC Focus” to around 860.
(f) Tap “Get” to show the current sensor position.
(g) Tap “-10D” to store it.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-98
(4) Confirmation and adjustment of the potentiometer in +10D position of split focus
(a) Attach the split focusing test eye of +10D.
Attach “+10D” in
the tip of the tool.
(b) Tap [+10D] of TRC-OCT Focus column in Motor Ctrl 1/2 tab.
(c) Move “TRC Focus” to around “+10D” position. (About 2780 in “CAN SEND TOOL”)
(d) Tap the [Capture] button in “Fundus Capture” frame in “Motor Ctl 1/2” to capture the image.
(e) Confirm the image clear resolution up to chart “I”.
• If the resolution is not good, repeat steps (b) ~ (c) to find the suitable focus position.
• When confirming the focus position, please adjust the magnification on the pylon viewer
to about 300% so that the resolving power chart of the split focusing test eye can be seen
clearly.
(f) Tap [Get] in “Position” to show the current sensor position.

(g) Tap the “+10D” button in the “Correction Save” frame in “TRC Focus”, store the +10D sensor position.
(h) Tap [-10D] in “TRC-OCT Focus” “Move” frame and then [+10D] in “TRC Focus” “Move” frame and
(i) Remove the split focusing test eye of +10D.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-99
(c) Move “TRC Focus” to around 2780.
(f) Tap “Get” to show the current sensor position.
(g) Tap “+10D” to store it.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-100
6.2.12 Installing the split unit/adjustment

Purpose
Repair and adjustment for the error related with split unit, motion failure of split unit (SPLIT-
MODULE(1024778－01)), the position error of split focus bar.
Necessary tools
Focusing tool OCT-1-09
Split image check tool OCT-1-32
Torque screwdriver (20 ~ 120cNm) OCT-1-35
Split 2 hole aperture tool OCT-1-38
Torque screwdriver bit OCT-1-54

VESSEL No.AC161100

BNC-BNC 2m cable
Tool adapter (small) OCT-1-64
SONY XC-E150/2 40423 68000

(For OCT-1-55)
IC Capture.exe -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-101
Projector -
(Penlight, etc., Alternative)
Procedure
(1) Replacement of split unit
(a) Remove the split unit.
i Remove the CN7 cable of OCT_IMG - BOARD (with latch on the back side), LAN cable of CN 1 (with
latch on the back side), camera link cable, and "2 screws fixing the sheet metal".
Remove while holding the
latch on the back side
CN1
CN7
Camera link cable
ii Loosen the two screws as shown in the figure below, rotate the sheet metal 90 degrees, and fix with the
one screw removed in (b).
Fasten with screws
iii Remove the two screws and remove the light shielding metal plate.
iv Remove the J271, J265 cable of TRC_M2-PCB.
J265 J271
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-102
v Remove the six screws and remove the light shielding metal plate.
This screw also serves

to fix the clip
vi Remove the split unit J 290, J 291, internal fixation cable.

vii Remove the three screws and remove the split unit.
viii Remove the J225 cable on the back side of the split unit.
Internal fixation cable
(b) Installing split unit.

i Connect the J225 cable to the backside of the split unit and install it in the direction shown in the figure
below. (Tighten the fixing screws with torque of 60cNm using the torque screwdriver. Apply the TA
lock over PTP 2.5×8_3BZn.)
ii Install the J271, J265 cable of TRC_M2 - PCB.
iii Refer to the procedure of (1) - (a), assemble it in a state that can turn on the power supply.
(J290 of the split sensor, J291 cable and camera link cable light shielding metal are not installed at this
point).
PTP 2.5×8_3BZn * Apply TA lock

Split unit sub
* Aligning direction
Mirror body base

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-103
(2) Confirmation of the 2 hole aperture position

(a) Turn ON the main unit.
(b) Start the CAN SEND TOOL.
(c) Set the following settings in CAN SEND TOOL.
Tab Zone Item Value
Motor Ctl 1/2 TRC OCT Focus Move 0D
Motor Ctl 1/2 Split IN/OUT - IN
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Bright 0% → SET
LCD Setting
Lamp Ctl Split LED Level 20 → SET
Lamp Ctl Split LED - ON

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-104
(d) Attach the split 2 hole aperture tool to the Object holder.
(e) Attach CCD camera and the capture parts (camera lens is not necessary).
Split 2 hole aperture tool

CCD camera
Object holder
(f) Execute “IC capture.exe”.
• Adjust the Split LED brightness level so that the tool's scale is observed clearly.
• It is also possible to make it easier to see by illuminating the split unit with the projector.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-105
Difference between right

and left: 2 divisions or less
Difference between upper

and lower: 4 divisions or less
Gap: 4.22 mm ±0.1mm or less

(Interval from center to center,
or from inside to outside)
Items Standard Note

Difference between right and left: 2 divisions or less (0.1 mm or less) Gap: 4.22 mm ± 0.1 mm
Difference between upper and 4 divisions or less (0.2 mm or less)
lower:
• If the image with split 2 hole aperture image is not within the specification, carry out the
following adjustment in mirror body.
(3) 2 hole aperture image adjustment

(a) After loosening the screws (2 points), use the focusing tool and readjust so that the vertical position
becomes within the standard by adjusting the eccentric pins.
Top surface of mirror body
Adjustment by swinging eccentric pin

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-106
(b) Check that the left and right 2 hole aperture images are located at the same position (Target reference:
19 scales). Turn off the power to the main unit and remove the split unit if the right and left positions
are not equal, in the rotation adjustment, readjust the right and left positions so that they are at the same
position.
Bottom surface of mirror body
Adjust of the rotation with

insert the tool after loosen
the two screws
Attach the TA lock

to two screws after
adjustment
Adjustment by swinging Adjustment by rotation
Adjust to 19 scales as a guide.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-107
(4) Confirmation of the split image position

(a) Attach the Object holder and split emission line verification tool to the objective lens cell.
(b) Attach the CCD camera and capture parts.
CCD camera Split emission line verification tool
Connect to PC
Objective front holder
(c) Tap [ON] on IR LED and tap "Set" on "Level 1".
• Adjust the brightness so that the light-shielding bar and tool scale can be observed clearly.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-108
(d) Rotate the gear manually to move to the position where both ends of the light shielding bar are well
focused.
Carry out the procedure (e) ~ (h) by referring the standard in the diagram.
Rotate the gear manually to move to the

position where both ends of the light
shielding bar are well focused.
Standard
Items Standard Remarks
Misalignment of light Left and right: within 0.3mm
shielding bar
Vignetting of split image No vignetting
by light shielding bar
Inclination of light Within ± 1° (patient side)
shielding bar
Split image location Horizontal center: ±0.35 mm or Check shift of lower from upper side equal to 1/6
less of emission line width to the left observing from
Vertical center (Split line position): objective lens side.
‒0.1 to ‒0.8 mm
(e) Confirm that the misalignment of light shielding bar is within the standard.
(f) Confirm that the vignetting of split image by light shielding bar is within the standard.
(g) Confirm that the inclination of light shielding bar is within the standard.
(h) Confirm that the split image location is within the standard. (If out of standard, proceed to next step.)
Verify that it is within the specification (±3.5 divisions).
Misalignment of light
shielding bar
Check the dust on the split bar.
Verify that it is within the

specification (-1 to -8 divisions).
Inclination of light
shielding bar
Verify 1/6 shift of the emission line.
Focus on these points by rotating the gear.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-109
(i) If out of the specification, re-adjust split image.

(j) Adjust Z direction to align horizontal positions of upper and lower emission lines.
(k) Re-adjust eccentric shaft and eccentric bush to make the split image stay within the specification.
(l) Adjust 1/6 to left between lower and upper side from objective lens during adjusting of Z direction.
ii. Adjust eccentric bush by inserting the tool to the hole.
i. Adjustment of Z axis direction
ii.Loosen the nut to adjust

the eccentric shaft.
ii. In case of bush

ii. Adjust eccentric shaft rotation, melt down the
by regular screwdriver. TA lock. When
tightening, tighten
equally on the right and
left sides.
i. Adjust Z direction to align ii. Re-adjust the split image iii. Adjust Z direction and
horizontal positions of upper position by eccentric shaft shift the emission line to
and lower emission lines. and eccentric bush. the left by 1/6.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-110
(m) Verify 0D position.

i Connect the J291 cable.
ii Carry out the following procedure with [Motor Control 1/2] tab of “CAN SEND TOOL”.
iii Click the [Get] button in “Split Unit Moto“ frmae to obtain current position.
iv Click the [Save] button at 0D to save the value.
Obtain 0D value (Shall be 2308DN or less).
Save 0D value.
(n) Connect the connector for motor.
Connect motor wiring.
(o) Attach the light shielding sheet metal.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-111
6.2.13 Adjustment of the split bar focus position

Purpose
Repair or adjustment for the error related with focus and split, split unit (SPLIT-MODULE(1024778-01))
failure, the position error of split focus bar.

• Preparation
• Adjustment of the split focus 0D position
• Adjustment of the split focus -10D position
• Adjustment of the split focus +10D position
• Confirm of the split focus +12D, -13D position
Necessary Tools
Diopter compensation check tool (-13/+12) OCT-1-02
Split focusing test eye (+10D/0D/-10D) OCT-1-10
pylon Viewer -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-112
Procedure
(1) Preparation
• Turn on the main unit and connect Baslercamera and PC.
• Caution the USBextension cable and Basler camera not to contact to PCB.
(protect the metal part of USB cable by wrapping the aircap)
(b) Connect the PC to the Basler camera through a USB 3.0 extension cable.
Caution for short

Unplug the USB cable of the Basler
camera connected to the GPU board
and connect it to the PC using the
USB 3.0 extension cable.
(2) Adjustment of the split focus 0D position.

(a) Attach the objective front holder and 0D split focusing model eye to the main unit.
The split focusing test eye
Use “0D” tool in

tip of the tool

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-113
(b) Execute “ pylon Viewer.exe”.
(c) Double click on “Basler ac ....”.

(d) Click the Features [Baslar ac ...] tab.
(e) Set the User Level to "Guru".
(f) Click “(+)” to open the information in “Acquisition Controls”.
(g) Set “Trigger Mode” to “OFF”.
(h) Click [Continuous Shot].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-114
(i) Execute CAN SEND TOOL.

(j) Tap [0D] in ｢TRC-OCT Focus｣-｢Move｣ frame in ｢Motor Ctl 1/2｣ tab.
(k) Tap [IN] in ｢Split IN/OUT｣ frame in ｢Motor Ctl 1/2｣ tab.
(l) After inputting split movement amount (approximate: 2000) to "Motor Ctl 1/2" - "Split Unit" - "Move",
tap [Move], Look for the position where the shading bar is in focus (2300 or more is NG (split
readjustment).
(Focus position: a position where the upper split is taken as a reference and the lower split is shifted by
1/6 right)
Input value accordingly.
Tap [Get] to show current position.

Tap [0D] to save 0D Position.
Ex.) “0D”, Adjust the position to be 1/6 off to the right

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-115
• If it cannot be determined by color image, switch to monochrome image.
i Click "Stop" of "Camera".
ii Click "Features" in "View".
iii Select "Mono 8" in "Image Format Control" - "Pixel Format".

*After completion of work, return to color image (YCbCr 422).
Monochrome image
After completing the work,

return to the color image
(YCbCr 422).
iv Click "Continuous Shot".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-116
(m) Tap [Get]. Confirm the current position.

(n) Tap [0D] in ｢Correction Save｣ frame to save “0D” position
Tap [Get] to show current position.

Tap [0D] to save 0D Position.
(o) Remove “0D” tool from the attached split focusing test eye.
(3) Adjustment of the split focus -10D position.

(a) Attach the Split focusing test eye (Use “-10D” tool in tip of the tool) to the Object holder.
Attach the Split focusing test eye
Use “-10D” tool in

tip of the tool
(b) Tap "CAN SEND TOOL" - "Motor Ctl 1/2 "-" TRC - OCT Focus "-" Move "- [- 10 D].
(c) After entering split movement amount (approximate: 3400) to "Motor Ctl 1/2" - "Split Unit" - "Move",
tap [Move], Look for a position where the light shielding bar is in focus.
(Focus position: a position where the upper split is taken as a reference and the lower split is shifted by 1/6
right)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-117
Ex.) “-10D”, Adjust the position to be 1/6 off to the right
(d) Tap [Get]. Confirm the current position.

(e) Tap [-10D] in ｢Correction Save｣ frame to save “-10D” position.
(f) Remove “-10D” tool from the attached split focusing test eye.
(4) Adjustment of the split focus +10D position.

(a) Attach the Split focusing test eye (Use “+10D” tool in tip of the tool) to the Object holder.
Attach the Split focusing test eye
Use “+10D” tool in

tip of the tool
(b) Tap "CAN SEND TOOL" - "Motor Ctl 1/2 "-" TRC - OCT Focus "-" Move "- [+ 10 D].
(c) After entering split movement amount (approximate: 1000) to "Motor Ctl 1/2" - "Split Unit" - "Move",
tap [Move], Look for a position where the light shielding bar is in focus.
(Focus position: a position where the upper split is taken as a reference and the lower split is shifted by 1/6
right)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-118
Ex.) “+10D”, Adjust the position to be 1/6 off to the right
(d) Tap [Get]. Confirm the current position.

(e) Then tap [+10D] in ｢Correction Save｣ frame to save “+10D” position.
(f) Remove “+10D” tool from the attach the split focusing test eye.
(5) Confirm of the split focus +12D, -13D position.

(a) Attach the diopter compensation check tool (-13/+12).
diopter compensation check tool (-13/+12)
(b) Tap [+12D] in ｢TRC-OCT focus｣ frame.
(c) Move the diopter compensation check tool (-13/+12) to “+12D”.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-119
(d) Confirm that the split bright line is within 1/4 from 1/6 offset.
Item Standard
split bright line within 1/4 from 1/6 offset
+12D
(e) Tap [-13D] in ｢TRC-OCT focus｣ frame.

(f) Move the diopter compensation check tool (-13/+12) to “-13D”.
(g) Confirm that the split bright line is within 1/4 from 1/6 offset.
Item Standard
split bright line within 1/4 from 1/6 offset
-13D
(h) Remove the diopter compensation check tool (-13/+12).
(i) Turn OFF main unit.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-120
6.2.14 Split analysis frame adjustment/Luminance adjustment

Purpose
Repair or adjustment for the error related with focus of fundus image and split, auto focus function failure,
the position error of split focus bar.

• Preparation
• Adjustment of split analysis frame
• Adjustment of the split brightness
• Confirmation of auto focus function
Necessary Tools
Split alignment schematic eye(0D) OCT-1-10
LAN cable -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-121
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Connect PC and the main unit with LAN cable.
(b) Attach the Object holder and Split alignment schematic eye(0D) to the main unit.
Split alignment schematic eye
※0D

(d) Show ｢page 9/9｣ in Tool mode.
Select [ON] of ｢Auto Focus Adjust｣ in ｢Adjust Mode｣.
Tap [OK] at the upper left on the monitor.
(e) Launch “IMAGEnet6” on PC.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-122
(f) Tap [Fundus Photo].
(g) Tap [Capture START] on the monitor of the main unit.
(h) Tap the bottom part on the alignment screen of ｢Camera 1｣ and ｢Camera 2｣ to display pupil marks.
(i) Tap [Capture START] again.
Pupil marks

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-123
(j) Tap [Focus]. Align the upper and lower split operating the purple indicator bar.
Focus
Align the upper

and lower split.
Purple indicator bar
(2) Adjustment of split analysis frame

(a) Align the split and the center of the split analysis frame (green rectangle and blue rectangle) operating
“4 arrow buttons in the split analysis frame movement” and “upper / lower arrow buttons in the lower
split analysis frame movement” as shown below.
Split analysis frame

movement
Lower split analysis

frame movement
Split analysis frame
Y Align the split and the

center of the split
analysis frame.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-124
(b) Confirm the adjustment accuracy in the horizontal Figure A

direction.
i Even if the center is matched, the horizontal centers of the
split analysis frames (green frames) may not match the
horizontal centers of the upper and lower splits due to a
split inclination, etc. as in Figure A.
ii In such a case, keep the position of the split analysis frames
(green frames) as they are as shown in Figure B and match
the center of the splits so that the lower split will be in the
center of the analysis frame (green frame).
iii At this time, confirm that the deviations L of the upper and
lower splits are within 1/4 of the width. Figure B
If 1/4 is exceeded, start from the matching of the split again
on the monitor of (h) and carry out the readjustment so that
the deviation L will be within 1/4 of the split.
(c) Tap [SAVE] to restart the main unit.
Make an adjustment to within 1/4 of

the width L.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Deviation of upper and lower splits Within 1/4 of the split width See Figure B

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-125
(3) Adjustment of the split brightness

(a) Select [ON] of ｢Auto Focus Adjust｣ in ｢Adjust Mode｣ ( step (1)-(d)).
(b) Tap [Capture START] to capture the image ( step (1)-(e) ~ (i)).
(c) Tap the [Observation light quantity adjustment] to set Observation light quantity to level 4 (maximum).
(d) Tap [△] [▽] on the four-way controller at the bottom left of the screen and adjust the SplitLED setting
value (Red letters value) so that the average brightness at the center of the green split analysis frame is
in the range of 185 ± 5, Make a note of the value.
Red: The setting values of SplitLED

The average of the brightness in the center part of split
analysis frame:
Green: The average of the brightness for upper split
Blue: The average of the brightness for lower split
Observation light quantity adjustment
Button to change the values of SplitLED
Item Standard Notes

Average brightness at the center of 185±5 Value of green mark
the split analysis frame
(e) Tap [SAVE] to restart the main unit.
(4) Confirm the auto focus function

(a) Select [ON] of ｢Auto Focus Adjust｣ in ｢Adjust Mode｣ (step (1)-(d)).
(b) Tap [Capture START] to capture the image (step (1)-(e) ~ (h))
(c) Tap [Focus]. Set “▼” mark to the right end of the bar operating the purple indicator bar.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-126
(d) Tap [Auto Focus Measure]. Then confirm matching of the split and measurement time within 0.931
second.
(e) Confirm the split LED value(Red letters value) saved in section 6.2.17(3).
Confirm the split LED value.
Confirm matching of the split.
Confirm measurement time.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Autofocus measurement time Within 0.931s Focus (+) side
(f) Tap [Focus]. Set “▼” mark to the left end of the bar operating the purple indicator bar.
(g)Tap [Auto Focus Measure]. Then confirm matching of the split and measurement time within 0.931
second.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Autofocus measurement time Within 0.931s Focus (-) side

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-127
6.2.15 Adjustment of the center ghost

Purpose
Black spot adjustment with issue of Center ghost or after replacement of ELBOW-
MODULE(1019967-01) for repair.
Attach the black spot adjustment check tool to the front side of the objective lens and carry out the
positioning of the black spot, center ghost measurement, and bright spot measurement.
This instruction describes the methods to perform the adjustments mentioned above.
The following settings and adjustment procedures are described in this section.
• Preparation
• Adjustment of black spot
• System environment setting
• Confirmation of ghost
Necessary tools
Black spot lens/center ghost check tool OCT-1-04
Torque screwdriver (20 ~120cNm) OCT-1-35
With M2/M2.5/M3 bit

Hexagonal wrench (for adjusting black spot) OCT-1-41
M118FM08 OCT-1-52

VESSEL No.AC161100
CPC3440-02 cable BNC-BNC 2m cable OCT-1-56
USB Cable A-B type OCT-1-57

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-128
Hexagonal wrench TTX-15 OCT-1-60
SONY XC-EI50/2 40423 68000

(For OCT-1-55)

(Connect with PC => Start the tool software "IC capture exe")
Pen light (LED light) -
IC capture.exe -
NWTool.exe -
(Tool Software for RGB measurement)
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Remove the cover of the main unit (section 6.1.4).
(b) Remove the CN7 cable of OCT_IMG - BOARD (with latch on the back side), LAN cable of CN 1
(with latch on the back side), camera link cable, and "2 screws fixing the sheet metal".


R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-129
(c) Loosen the two screws as shown in the figure below, rotate the sheet metal 90 degrees, and fix with the
one screw removed in (b).
Fasten with screws
(d) Remove the two screws and remove the light shielding metal plate.
(e) Remove the J271, J265 cable of TRC_M2-PCB.
(f) Remove the six screws and remove the light shielding metal plate.

to fix the clip

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-130
(g) Remove the split unit J 291, internal fixation cable.

(h) Remove the three screws and remove the split unit.
(i) Remove the J225 cable on the back side of the split unit.
Internal fixation cable
J291
(j) Attach the tools.

i Attach the Black spot lens/center ghost check tool and the CCD camera in front of the Object holder.
CCD and Lens Black spot Object holder
l / t
EI50 CCD Camera Connection Cable USB Cable

(OCT-1-56) Video to USB (OCT-1-57) PC
（OCT-1-55）
Power supply
AC DC-700 EI 50 CCD Cam Startup PC application software
Power (4042368000) IC Capture.exe and
observe the CCD image

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-131
ii Remove the xenon unit and illuminate the scale with the outside lamp.
iii Insert black spot adjustment driver (two) and hexagonal 1.5mm wrench in the black spot adjustment
screw.
Then loosen the two screws which fix the unit for the light axis in about one turn.
Use the hexagonal wrench with short tip since the work space is narrow in this operation.
• Befor removing the black spot adjustment screws, dissolve TA lock with solvent in
advance.
Insert a hexagonal 1.5mm

wrench (There is a screw at the
tip of the dustproof sponge)
Black spot adjustment driver

The hexagonal wrench from the opposite side. Three adjustment screws
Photography: Put in the light shielding sheet =Knob center

Adjustment: Put out the light shielding sheet =Knob down
Adjust in the condition that the screws are tightened and

then loosened by one rotation.
(Use hexagonal wrench with short tip)
Remove the xenon unit and illuminate a

scale with the outside lamp

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-132
(2) Adjust the position of the black spot

(a) To make sure that the scale and the black spot image can be seen, adjust the position of the outside
Lamp.
Put out the light shielding sheet of Black spot lens/center ghost check tool.
Adjustment: Put out the light shielding sheet =Knob down
(b) Adjust the black spots to the center of the scale while watching the monitor with black spot adjustment
driver (two) and hexagonal 1.5mm wrench.
(c) After adjustment is completed, tighten the two screws and apply TA lock.
• The judgment of the quality of adjustment is subsequently done by the ghost

confirmation on the following condition. If the result of ghost confirmation is not good,
adjust the black point again.
(d) Return the plate, attach the cable to CN 7 of OCT_IMG - BOARD, and put it in a state that can turn on
the power.
(3) Confirm the ghost

(a) Connect the PC and the main unit with the LAN cable.
(b) Turn on the power of the main unit.
(c) Set the "setting menu" - "fundus photography" - "flash level" to "4.0 Ws" and tap [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-133
(d) Capture the ghost image

i Start “IMAGEnet 6”.
ii Put in the light shielding sheet of Black spot lens/center ghost check tool.
Photography: Put in the light shielding sheet = Knob center

iii Tap [Fundus Photo].
iv Tap [Capture START] on the monitor of the main unit.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-134
v Tap the bottom part on the alignment screen of ｢Camera 1｣ and ｢Camera 2｣ to display pupil marks.
vi Tap [Capture START] again.
Pupil marks
vii Tap [Advance] - [Focus] - [LENS-].
viii Maximize the shooting light amount and tap [Capture START].
Xe emits light and capture is done.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-135
ix Save Ghost image.

File name is arbitrary (saved as bmp file)
(e) Analyze the ghost

i Start NWTool.exe.
ii Open the saved ghost image in NWTool.exe.

• Click the "Central Ghost" tab.
• Click the following figure
• Select the shot image
• Click Open

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-136
(f) Select the center of the ghost

i Double-click near the center of the ghost
If you double-click the center of the ghost of the image displayed at the top left of the tool software
screen (see the following figure), the analysis frame (red frame) will move to near the ghost center.
Adjusts the + mark to the center of the ghost as close as possible.
• The center ghost image can be enlarged or reduced by scrolling the mouse.
Center of ghost
Double-clicks near the center of the ghost
(g) Select the shadow measurement area.

i Chooses the top, the bottom, the left/the right.at shadow area selection.
ii Check each RGB value, and check the place where the total number is the highest.
iii Select the place with the highest value with total.
shadow area selection Confirm where the total

number is highest

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-137
iv Confirm that "Dark" and "Dff" are within the standard.

Standard
Item Dark Dff. Notes
R Avg 11 or less 18 or less The Dff is the
G Avg 7 or less 9.4 or less luminance value of the
B Avg 5 or less 4.8 or less ghost
(Ghost – Dark = Dff)
If it fails, turn off the power supply of the main unit and retry from item (1).
(h) Confirm the bright spot (confirmation of the defect of the objective lens).
If the figure of the “Counts over RGB200” is 0, it means that there is no bright spot whose maximum
brightness value exceeds 200.
In such a case, exchange the s an object lens.
(i) After completing the work, do "split unit installation, adjustment" (section 6.2.12).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-138
6.2.16 TRC_M2-PCB Adjustment

Purpose
Describe the procedure for replacing the TRC_M2 PCB (1022959-01) when the camera is not
powered due to an error of "Camera is not connected" or when various adjustments cannot be
made and recovery is not possible, for example, when the power of the camera is not supplied
or when the functions controlled by the TRC_M2 PCB are malfunctioning.
Necessary tools
Tool name Part No. Image
IR card OCT-1000-03
Digital voltmeter -
Manufacturer: FLUKE
Type name: 111 TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
DC voltage range: 0 to 500 V or more
Measurement accuracy:0.5 [%] or more
Procedure
(1) Pre-inspection confirmation
Check the setting of the DIP SW of the substitute TRC_M2- PCB(section 2.3.3 step (7)).
Bit Setting Function
Bit1 OFF Unused
Bit2 OFF Unused
Bit3 OFF Unused
Bit4 OFF Unused
(2) Inspection procedure
Test Items and Content List
Step
Inspection item Details of inspection
numbers
(3)- (b) Check each output voltage See section 2.3.3 (7)
・ TRC focus motor
・ Diopter correction motor
・ Split motor
(5)- (a) Motor operation and sensor value check
・ Split I/O motor (motor operation only)
・ Aperture changeover motor (motor operation only)
・ IR correction motor
・ Check that the anterior segment fixation LED is lit.
・ Check that the internal fixation lamp OLED is lit.
(5)- (b) LED lighting check ・ Check that the anterior segment observation LED is lit.
・ Check that the split LED is lit.
・ Check that the fundus observation LED is lit.
Check that the LCD reversal sensor value can be obtained
(5)- (c) Check LCD reversal sensor value
correctly.
(5)- (d) Checking the version Check that the version is written.
Check that error handling works when the light blocking state of
(5)- (e) Check operation of cover detection sensor
the cover detection sensor is changed.
Adjusting blink detection and checking Check that the blink detection voltage changes when the light
(5)- (f)
operation blocking state of the blink detection sensor is changed.
(5)-(g) Checking TRC focus operation Check that the focus positions of 0D and ±10D are aligned.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-139
(3) Replacing the TRC_M2 PCB

(a) Remove the TRC_M2 PCB (section 6.1.31)
• If it is difficult to remove, please move the position of the main unit with CAN SEND
TOOL - "Motor Ctl 2/2" - "XYZ Motor".
(b) Check each output voltage

i Make sure that the main unit is powered off.
ii Install the TRC_M2 PCB UNIT and connect the connector J201.
• Do not connect other connectors.
iii Turn on the power supply of the main unit and confirm that the voltage of each part falls within the
standard (section 2.3.3 step (7)).
iv Turn OFF the power.
v Connect each unit of the main unit to the TRC_M2 PCB (section 2.3.3 step (7)).
(c) Update the software(section 5.1).
(4) Writing Setting Values on TRC_M2 PCB

(a) Start the CAN SEND TOOL (section 4.2.2).
(b) Select "EEPROM Corr", tap [Write] in the FW EEPROM All field (left side of the window) for the
displayed data (GPU board memory value), and write the setting values to the GPU board.
(c) To compare, tap [Compare] in the FW EEPROM All field (right side of the window) and check that
there is no difference between the setting on the GPU board side and the setting on the TRC_M 2 PCB
side.
• When an error message is displayed in the above operations, repeat the operations described
in (2) and thereafter.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-140
(5) Adjustment of TRC_M2 PCB

(a) Motor operation and sensor value check
i Turn on the main unit.
ii Start the CAN SEND TOOL (section 4.2.2).
iii Check that the motor operation and sensor values shown below can be obtained normally using
CAN_SEND_TOOL"-"Motor Ctl 1 /2....
Confirmation method: 1. Enter an arbitrary value in the "Move" - "Sensor" field and tap [Move].
2. Tap "Posion" - [Get] and confirm that the entered value is displayed.
• Check with TRC Focus Motor - "TRCFocus"
• Check with Direction Correction Motor - "Visibility Adjust"
• Check with split motor - "Split Unit"
• Split I/O motor (motor operation only) - Tap [IN] → [OUT] at "Split IN/OUT" to check operation
sound.
• Aperture selector motor(motor operation only) - Tap [Normal] → [SPupil] at "Small Pupil" to check
operation sound.
• IR correction motor (motor operation only) - Tap [IN] → [OUT] at "TRC IN/OUT" to check operation
sound.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-141
(b) LED lighting check

i Tap "Set after setting "ON / OFF" menu to "1: LED 1 - ON" in "CAN_SEND_TOOL" - "Fixation Ctl" -
"Anterior Fixation LED" frame and visually check if the anterior eye fixation LED light up. (see the
figure below). Check "2: LED 2 - ON" to "8: LED 8 - ON" in order using the same manner.
ii Visually confirm that the internal fixation lamp OLED is illuminated.
iii Use the IR card to visually confirm that the anterior segment observation LED is illuminated.
iv Visually check that the split LED is lit.
v Visually check that the fundus observation LED is lit.
When "1: LED 1 - ON" to "7: LED 7 -

ON" are turned ON in order, it lights
up in the order of fixation from the
upper right to clockwise.
Tap "8: LED 8 - ON" to turn on all.
(c) Check the operation of the LCD reversing sensor.

i Tap [Get] selecting "CAN SEND TOOL" - "Lamp Ctl" - "LCD Reversal Sensor".
ii Flip the LCD monitor, tap [Get], and confirm that the display of "Result" changes.
• The display of Rsulet is "Upright" when the LCD monitor is raised (when the
LCD_TURN_SENSOR is shaded) and "Reversal" when the LCD monitor is lowered
(without LCD_TURN_SENSOR shading).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-142
(d) Checking the version

i Use the CAN Send Tool to verify that the version is the same as the version that you written.
In the Main Ctl"-"CPU Version"-"Target field, select TRC_M2 PCB and tap Get.
For example, TRC_M2 PCB Version 1.000, 1,0,0,0 is displayed from the left.
(e) Check operation of cover detection sensor

i Remove the lamp house cover and check that the following error messages are displayed.
“The lamp house cover has been removed. Turn off the power and close the cover [209109].”
ii If no errors are displayed, replace the COVER_SENSOR (1024566-01).
(f) Adjusting and checking blink detection (section 6.2.7).
(g) Check the TRC focus operation (section 6.2.11).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-143
6.2.17 Adjustment of OCT-PCB

Purpose
Repair associated with replacement of the OCT-PCB (1021856-01) due to malfunctioning of
the SLD, optical path length, OCT focusing, polarization controller, etc. (adjustment of the
PCB unit in relation to SLD control) is described. Check the relevant chapters for other
information.
No Product Name
1 SLD_MODULE-PCB
2 OCT-PCB
• After adjustment, manage the above two units as one set.

• The SLD_MODULE has different rated current, PD current at the time of application of rated
current, and optical power for each MODULE. Unless set control is performed, the SLD may
be damaged.
Necessary tools
Oscilloscope (hereinafter referred to as oscilloscope) -
Digital Voltmeter (hereafter referred to as "digital voltmeter") -

Manufacturer: FLUKE
Type name: 111 TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
DC voltage range: 0 to 500 V or more
Measurement accuracy: 0.5 [%] or more
Procedure
(1) Replacement of OCT-PCB
(a) Replace the OCT-PCB (section 6.1).
• Check that the DIPSW of SW2 is turned off from Bit1 to 4.
(b) Update the software (section 5.1).
(2) Writing Setting Values on OCT_PCB

(a) Start the CAN SEND TOOL (section 4.2.2).
(b) Select "EEPROM Corr" and tap [Write] in the FW EEPROM All field (left side of the window) for the
displayed data (GPU board memory value) to write the setting values to the OCT-PCB.
(c) To compare, tap [Compare] in the FW-ARM EEPROM All field (right side of the window) to check
that there is no difference between the GPU-board setting and the OCT-PCB setting.
• When an error message is displayed in the above operations, repeat the operations described
in (2) and thereafter.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-144
(3) Check the light intensity control: Adjust/check the DACLEVEL.

(a) Turn off the main unit.
(b) Connect the +-side probe of the digital border to the TP14 (SLD actual current → equivalent to 100
[mA] per [V]).
The GND pin of the - side probe is connected to TP3 (AG).
(c) Connect the Oscillator probe to TP12 and the GND-pin to TP3.
(d) Turn on the main unit.
(e) Start the CAN SEND TOOL and perform the following settings.
i Set "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"Level" to "400" and tap [Set only].
• Level = DAC Level
ii Set Lamp Ctl-"SLD"-"SLDPulse" to "0:Sequent" and tap Set.

iii Select "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"ON/OFF" from "Low" to "HIGH".
(f) Check that the OCT_PCB LED5 is illuminated.
(g) Set "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"SLDLimit" to "1023" and tap [Save].
• "SLD Limit", "1023" = SLD Current Limit Full Open

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-145
(h) Confirm that the TP14 does not exceed the SLD maximum current. Repeat [Level ]→ [Set] to gradually
increase the maximum current to a level equivalent to the rated current of the SLD. Record Level.
• The SLD rated current is described in the fiber unit.
• For a SLD-rated current of 160 mA: TP14 = 1.6 V
For 200mA: TP14 = 2.0V
Rated current of
(i) Increase "Level" so that the TP14 voltage becomes the rated current of "SLD+0.05 [V]".
Standard
Item Standard Remark
TP14 SLD rated current+0.05V
(j) Lower the [SLD Limit], adjust the TP14 voltage to be within the range of "(rated current of
SLD+0.02[V])±0.01[V]", and record "SLD Limit".
Standard
TP14 (SLD rated current + 0.02V) ± 0.01V Record the SLD Limit

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-146
(k) Increase "Level" to ensure that the TP14 does not rise above "(rated current for SLDs) + 0.05V.
(l) After checking, lower "Level" to the values recorded in (i). At this time, make sure that the TP14
voltage is the original voltage (rated current of SLD).
(m) Tap [Save] in the [Level] field to Save.
• Go to step (4) with the oscillos connected.
(4) Check the light intensity control: Check/set the PD reference value.
(a) Records the TP12 values. (PD value when CW is lit)
(b) Select "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"ON/OFF" from "Low" to "OFF".
(c) Set "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"SLDPulse" to "1:Brinking", tap [Set], and then set "ON/OFF" to
"Low"→"HIGH".
(d) Set the vertical axis of the channel connected to the TP12 of the oscilloscope to 500 [mV/div] and the
horizontal axis to 5 [μs/div], and measure the voltage in accordance with the TP12 HI-level voltage in
the following measuring range.
• TP12 between 2.0 [V] and 1.0 [V]: 500 [mV/div]
i Adjust the GND level of the measurement channel of the oscillos to the second scale from the bottom.
ii As shown in the figure below, the time cursor 1 is aligned with the rise of the pulse, and the time cursor
2 is moved to the point 5 [μsec] after the rise of the pulse.
iii Adjust the amplitude cursor 1 to the GND level of the channel connected to the TP12. Adjust the
amplitude cursor 2 to the intersection point of the time cursor 2 and the pulse waveform. Record the
voltage value to the third decimal place. (PD value when the PW is lit)
Record the value rounded to the nearest fourth decimal place when the voltage value [V] of the oscillos
is indicated to the nearest fourth decimal place.
Time cursor 1 Time cursor 2
Amplitude cursor 22
MEASURED
VALUE [V] Amplitude
5 [μs]

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-147
iv Note that the amplitude cursor 2 may not match the waveform as shown in the figure above due to the
resolution problem of the oscilloscope.
In this case, the cursor should be positioned at a position lower than the peak value of the pulse
waveform as shown in the figure below (left side), and the cursor should be moved upward one step at a
time and measured at a point exceeding the peak value of the waveform.
Time cursor 2 Time cursor 2

NG OK Amplitude cursor
Amplitude cursor
MEASURED
VALUE [V]
(e) Turn SLD ON/OFF from Low to OFF.

(f) Enter the voltage value (TP12) × 1000 recorded in the previous step (d) in "PD" and tap [Save]

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-148
(5) Check the light intensity control: Check the PD reference value setting.
(a) Confirm that the values entered in the previous steps (4)-(f) are reflected in the [Page 8/9]-[SLD
Adjustment]-[Standard PD Value].
(b) If they do not match, return to steps (4)-(f) and enter the voltage value (TP12)×1000 again.
(c) Turn OFF the power.
(6) Check the temperature control circuit.

(a) Check the temperature reference value
i Connect the oscillo probe to the TP13. The GND pin of the probe connects to TP3 (AG).
ii Turn on the main unit.
iii Start CAN SEND TOOL.
iv Select "0:Sequent" from "Lamp Ctl", "SLD", "SLDPulse".
v Select "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"ON/OFF" from "Low" to "HIGH".
vi Confirm that the voltage of the TP13 signal becomes 1.25 ± 0.15 [V] and record the voltage of the TP13
signal.
Standard
TP13 1.25±0.15V Record the value

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-149
(b) Setting of temperature reference value

i In the CAN SEND TOOL, enter the temperature reference value (measured value of TP13 × 100)
checked in the previous steps (6)-(a) in "Lamp Ctl"-"SLD"-"Temperture" and tap [Save].
ii Turn off the power to the main unit and restart it.
iii Confirm that the values entered in the previous step (i) are reflected in the [Page 8 /9]-[SLD
Adjustment]-[Reference Temperature Value].
iv Turn off the power to the main unit.

(c) The DAC and PD values entered in the fiber unit are rewritten to the set values.
• The PD value must be the previous value to be multiplied by 1000.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-150
DAC 705
P D 976

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-151
6.2.18 Adjustment when replacing GPU_BOARD

• Follow the description below. If any adjustments except the procedures in this section
were carried out, the failure would not be solved.
• Micro SD_CARD should be exchanged in combination with GPU_BOARD. Be sure to
use formatted Micro SD_CARD for Maestro II. If you use Micro SD_CARD for
commercial use or Micro SD_CARD from a different instrument, it will not start
normally, so do not use it.
Purpose
Repair for replacement due to the failure on GPU_BOARD (1032008-01) like below.
Application software on the main unit does not work. (In case of black screen or white screen on LCD
monitor) The software repeats the boot condition.
Necessary Tools
USB memory -
Special file -
(7D311A6B-6825-4977-ABC3-B4A432F7B0D2)
Send Calibration Data -
LAN cable -
Perform the following procedures in this section of the manual.

• Export the configuration file (xxxxxx.xml) and CLB file from the instrument where the defect occurred.
※If cannot, execute next procedure.
• Install the replacement GPU_BOARD after removal of broken GPU_BOARD.
• After turning ON, import the customized xml file or shipping xml file.
• Input Serial Number of the instrument to the new GPU_BOARD (default Serial Number is 000001) in
Information of SETUP Menu.
• Send Fundus Calibration or Anterior Calibration to the new GPU_BOARD.
• Confirm that the error message and other abnormalities do not occur after capture.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-152
Procedure
(1) Exporting the configuration file and calibration file
• If the operation to export the file is not completed due to the instrument failure, proceed
to step (2) “Replacement of ARM-BOARD”.
• In case of executing the export procedure, it should be done in tool mode. When you
replace the machine, export procedure should be done in user mode. Machine may
malfunction if you do not do it in correct procedure.
(a) Turn OFF the main unit. Insert the USB memory to USB slot.
(The USB memory should be formatted in “FAT32” in advance.)
(b) Tap [Settings], select "Information" → "Export" tab and tap [Export] in "Setting file", "Rescaling file",
"Anterior ocular CLB file".
(c) Export the rescaling file (fundus CLB file) and anterior segment CLB file ( section 5.2).
• If you need a system log, tap [Export] in "System Log".
(d) Connect the USB memory to the PC, check that the OCT folder is created, and the xml file and the
CLB file are created in the folder.
USB memory
└─ oct …Folder
├─XXXXXX.xml …Setting file
├─XXXXXX_3DOCT-1_ANTERIOR.CLB …Anterior eye segment CLB file
└─XXXXXX_3DOCT-1_FUNDUS.CLB …Fundus CLB file (Rescaling file)
("XXXXXX" is the serial number of the instrument)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-153
(2) Replacement of GPU-BOARD

(a) BATTERY_PCB: Remove BATTERY_CBL (1022264-01) from J1.
J1
(b) GPU_BOARD: Remove the cable for CPU_FAN_UNIT (1025808-01) from CN7200.
(c) Remove the 4 screws fixing the shield plate.
CN7200
(d) Remove the following cables.

No. Connector Cable PCB
1 CN1100 GPU_IO_CABLE1 (1022675-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
3 CN4560 INT_USB_CABLE (1022335-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
4 CN4561 LCD_TOUCH-CABLE (1022335-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
5 CN4580 CAM_USB3_CABLE (1022335-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
6 CN5220*1 LCD_VIDEO_CABLE (1022335-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
7 CN6000 INT_USB_CABLE (1022335-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
9 CN8510 GPU_POW_CABLE (1022675-01) GPU_BOARD (1032008-01)
10 J12 ANT_OBS_CABLE (1022675-01) NTSC_CSI-PCB UNIT (1022101-01)
11 J13 ANT_OBS_CABLE2 (1022698-01) NTSC_CSI-PCB UNIT (1022101-01)
②
*1. Remove the ⑥ ①
connector straight up. ⑧ ⑨
⑪ ⑩
Remove the 2 screws and
④
remove the sheet metal.
⑦
⑤
③
⑥

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-154
(e) Remove 4 spacers and remove GPU_BOARD.

(f) Remove 4 screws and remove NTSC_CSI - PCB UNIT.
(g) Remove MicroSD_CARD.
(h) Install NTSC_CSI - PCB UNIT on alternate GPU_BOARD ( step(1) - (f) (g)).
(i) Install MicroSD_CARD on the substitute GPU_BOARD.
(j) Install substitute GPU_BOARD on the main unit ( step (1) - (a) ~(e)).
(k) Apply TA lock to the 4 screws fixing the shield plate.
(3) Setting the date and time

(b) After turning on the main unit, the message "Internal battery may have run out. Please set date and time.
[300404]" will be displayed, so carry out the calendar setting.
(c) Enter the setting menu in tool mode, select "Date time" on page 6, and set the current time.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-155
(4) Operation to import the configuration file

If the operation to export the file is not completed due to the instrument failure in step (1), copy the initial
configuration file (xml file) at the shipping from the factory to the USB memory.
(a) Insert the USB memory with the configuration file to the USB slot on the main unit.
(b) Tap [Information] in “Setup” screen. Tap the [Import] button in “Setting File” menu in the [Import] tab.
(c) Select the OCT folder, select the corresponding xml file, and tap [Open].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-156
(d) Turn OFF the main unit. Then turn ON the main unit again.
• When importing the factory default xml file, the language is set to Japanese.
In case of switching to English, select "English" from "Language" on the 4th page of
setting menu and tap [OK].
SET UP
Language

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-157
(5) Setting of the serial number

(a) Copy the special file (7D311A6B-6825-4977-ABC3-B4A432F7B0D2) to the USB memory. Insert the
USB memory to the main unit.
(b) When the main unit recognizes the USB memory correctly, it is possible to change the serial number for
the product. Tap the [Information] button. Tap the button to input the serial number in “Product serial
number” menu in the [Basic] tab.
If the main unit cannot recognize the USB memory correctly, the cause might be the USB memory
recognition failure or the special file failure. Replace the USB memory or the special file. Carry out the
same procedure again after re-starting the main unit.
(c) The screen to input the serial number will be displayed. Input the serial number, then tap the [OK]
button.
* The serial number can be confirmed on the sticker attached on the side surface of the main unit as well.
Ex.) the sticker with the serial number
(6) Update the main unit software(section 5.1).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-158
(7) Fundus Calibration Data / Anterior Calibration Data setup

• If you can not export the fundus CLB file and anterior eye CLB file in step (1), please
obtain it from TOPCON support site.
(a) Connect LAN cable from main body to PC.

(b) Turn the power SW “ON” on the Main body.
(c) Execute ” Send calibration data.exe”.
(d) Confirm the dialog as shown below is displayed. Tap the [Reference] button of the fundus side.
(e) Select the calibration data ”xxxxxx_3DOCT-1 FUNDUS.CLB”.
(f) As above the same procedure, select xxxxxx_3DOCT-1_ANTERIOR.CLB after clicking [Reference]
of Anterior Calibration Data.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-159
(g) Click [Send] after checking the selection of Fundus CLB and Anterior CLB.
(h) Click [Yes] when the dialog as shown below is displayed.
(i) When the dialog shown below is displayed, click the [OK] button.
(8) Confirmation
Taking the shot, confirm that the operation will be done correctly.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-160
6.2.19 Pupil position adjustment

Purpose
Confirm and Adjust the SLD light to the pupil center in front of the objective lens.
• The procedure desctribed in this chapter should be done after adjustment of the OCT
focusing lens 0D (section 6.2.21).
Necessary tools
OCT pupil position check tool OCT-1-17
Tool adapter (large) OCT-1-63
SONY XC-EI50/2 (Hereinafter referred to as a CCD camera) 40423 68000

(For OCT-1-55)
PC -
LAN cable -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-161
IC capture.exe -
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach tools
Attach OCT pupil position check tool and CCD camera to the Object holder.
OCT pupil
position check
CCD and Lens tool Object holder

（OCT-1-55）
Power supply
AC DC-700 EI 50 CCD Cam Start up PC application software
Power (4042368000) IC Capture.exe.
Observe the CCD image
(b) launch IC Capture.
(c) Turn on Power supply DC-700

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-162
(2) Setting of CAN SEND TOOL

(a) After turning on the main unit, launch CAN SEND TOOL.
(b) Make the following settings.
Tab Zone Item Value
Main Ctl Galvano Live - ON
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data Start X
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data End X Spot (2048 auto input) →
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data Start Y Set (Single)
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data End Y
Lamp Ctl SLD SLD Pulse Blinking → Set
Lamp Ctl SLD ON/OFF Low

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-163
(c) Setting SLD

i Adjust the light power in Pulse Width.
Adjust the light power with the pulse width and the CCD camera aperture to make the light spot and
scale clearly visible.
• Record the default value of "Pulse Width" and return to the default value after work.
Adjust the pulse width and the CCD camera

aperture to make the light spot and scale
visible clearly.
(3) Adjust pupil position.

(a) Move the collimator fiber holder with the hand. Adjust light spot to center of circle scale within 1
division (0.1mm).
(b) Tighten the two CR3X8S-SW+FW_3BZn) screws.
(c) Confirm that the galvano position is within the standard (standard: ±0.05mm (within 1 scale))
( section 6.2.19 step (2)).
If out of standard, adjust alternately until the galvano position and pupil position fall within the
specification at the same time.
(d) Apply TA lock to screws CR3×8S-SW+FW_3BZn (2pcs).
CR3X8S-SW+FW_3BZn
Apply TA lock.
Collimator fiber holder
(4) Remove the OCT pupil position check tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-164
6.2.20 Galvano adjustment

Purpose
Adjustment with issue of Scan line or after replacement of Galvano Unit (47010 68500) with “Galvano error”
for repair
Necessary Tools
Galvano OCT optical axis adjustment check tool OCT-1-16
SONY XC-EI50/2(Hereinafter referred to as a CCD camera) 40423 68000

(For OCT-1-55)
PC -
Torque screwdriver ( With M2/M2.5/M3 bit) OCT-1-35

(20 ~ 120cNm)
IC Capture -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-165
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach the galvano adjustment tool.
Make sure to tighten the upper right screw first. Firmly fix three points.
(b) Attach EI50 to the Galvano adjustment tool. Attach Tamron M118FM25.
Galvano adjustment tool
EI50 + 25mm Lens
Object holder
SONY EI50 connection diagram

Cable USB Cable
（OCT-1-55） (IC capture)
Power supply
DC-700
AC （OCT-1-50） EI50 CCD Cam
Power (4042368000)
(c) Launch IC Capture.
(d) Turn on Power supply DC-700

(e) Launch CAN SEND TOOL.
(f) Make the following settings.
Tab Zone Item Value
Main Ctl Galvano Live - ON
Motor Ctl 1/2 OCT Focus Motor Move 0D
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern
7:All points light → Set
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Bright
10:100%
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Brink
OFF
LCD Setting
Galvano Ctl Live Scan data Start X
Galvano Ctl Live Scan data End X (2048 auto input)
Galvano Ctl Live Scan data Start Y → Set (Single)
Galvano Ctl Live Scan data End Y
Lamp Ctl SLD Pulse Width 5 → Set *2
Lamp Ctl SLD ON/OFF Low
*1. Adjust the value of Level 1 until the scale of Galvano OCT optical axis adjustment check tool becomes easy to
see.
*2. Record the default values and set the vales back to default after completing work.
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-166

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-167

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-168

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-169
(2) Adjustment
(a) Adjust Pulse Width and lens aperture on CCD camera to clear of SLD light, scale.
(b) Adjust the galvano position.

(i) Adjust the position by moving the X and Y galvano so that the spot will match the center of the scale.
(ii) Fix the two 6SU3×4S 3BZn screws for each unit.
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Displacement standard within ±0.05 (within 1 scale unit)
*Adjust the center to the target

Displacement standard: within ±0.05 (within
1 scale unit)
(c) Do final tightening of the galvano fixing screws.

(i) Do final tightening of the four 6SU3×4S 3BZn screws with torque of 30cNm using a torque driver.
(ii) Confirm that the positional deviation is within the standard again after final tightening.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-170
(d) Confirm the galvano inclination (X-axis).

i Tap [H Line] of "Galvano Ctl "-" Custom Scan Data "-" 1. Live "-" Live-Scan data" and "StartX" "0",
"EndX" "4095", " StartY "," EndY "" 2048 "are set, and tap [Set (Single)].
ii Confirm the inclination in the X direction.
0.1 mm
(1 scale unit)
4 mm
(40 scale units)
Standard : within ±45’

(within 1 scale unit in 4mm scan)
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Inclination in the X direction within ±45’ (within 1 scale unit in
4mm scan)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-171
(e) Confirm the galvano inclination (Y-axis).

i Tap "V Line" of "Galvano Ctl" - "Custom Scan Data" - "1. Live" - "Live-Scan data" and "2048" to
"StartX", "EndX" to " 0 "," EndY "are set to" 4095 ", then tap [Set (Single)].
ii Confirm the inclination in the Y direction.

0.1mm
(1 scale unit)
4mm
(40 scale units)
Standard : within ±45’

(within 1 scale unit in 4mm scan)
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Inclination in the Y direction within ±45’ (within 1 scale unit in
4mm scan)
(f) Detach the galvano adjustment tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-172
6.2.21 Adjustment of the 0D focus for focusing lens

Purpose
This repair work should be done in the following case:
- When the B-scan image signal level is low because “OCT focus motor initialization error” has occurred
or the OCT focusing operation is not good.
Necessary Tools
OCT_0D focus check tool OCT-1-15
Video to USB2.0 converter DFG/USB2Pro OCT-1-55

BNC-BNC 2m cable

(For OCT-1-55)
PC -
LAN cable -
IC Capture -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-173
Procedure
(1) Location confirmation of galvano mirror
Refer to the galvano adjustment procedure and adjust the position of the point light source to the center of
the tool scale (section 6.2.20).
(2) Preparation
(a) Attach the Object holder, the OCT_0D focus check tool and the CCD camera to the instrument.
Do not attach the positioning pin of the objective front holder.
0D focus position
CCD camera check tool
Object holder
(b) Connect the instrument to the PC. Then turn ON the instrument.
(3) Focus adjustment of focusing lens

(a) Launch “CAN SEND TOOL”.
(b) Set the respective values as shown below.
• Change settings of SLD Pulse and Pulse Width when SLD on / off setting is OFF. If you
change the setting in the ON state, it may affect the light emission lifetime of the SLD.
Tab Zone Item Value

Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data Start X 0 *1
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data End X 4095 *1
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data Start Y 2048 *1
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data End Y 2048 *1
Motor Ctl 1/2 OCT Focus Motor Sensor 2500 → Move
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern External → Set
LCD Setting
Lamp Ctl SLD ON / OFF Low
*1. By tapping "Galvano Ctl" - "Live-Scan data" - [H Line] at CAN SEND TOOL, confirm that the
value has been changed and tap [Set (Single)] to set it.
*2. Adjust the value of Level 1 so that the scale of "OCT_0D focus check tool" becomes easy to see.
*3. Adjust the CCD camera lens aperture and “Pulse Width” to see the spot light intensity easily.
Record the default values and set the vales back to default after completing work.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-174
(c) At the “OCT-Focus Motor” frame of the “Motor Ctl 1/2” tab, perform adjustment as described below.
i Rotate the Object holder and fix the OCT_0D focus check tool so that the scale and the galvanic line do
not overlap and fix the screws of the front object holder in 4 places.
ii Change the value of “Sensor” at the “Move” frame and tap [Move] to move the focusing lens to the
position where the galvano line in the thinnest status is seen.
Adjust to the position where the line in

the thinnest status is seen.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-175
iii Tap [0D] in the “Correction Save” frame to save the focusing lens position.
iv In the “Move” frame, move the focusing lens to others except the place where “0D” is set.
v Tap [0D] in the “Move” frame.
vi Tap [Get] in the “Position” frame and make sure that the displayed value of “Sensor” is the same as the
adjusted value.
(i)(ii)(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(iii)
(d) Write the value of the 0D sensor in the check sheet.
(4) Adjusting the 0D optical axis and pupil position

(a) 0D pupil position adjustment
Adjust the pupil position ( section 6.2.19) .
(b) 0D optical axis adjustment
Adjust the Galvano position ( section 6.2.20) .
(c) After adjusting the pupil position, check the galvano position and check that it is within the standard.
If out of standard, adjust (a) and (b) alternately until the galvano position and pupil position fall within
the specification at the same time.
(5) Adjustment of OCT focusing lens ±15D

(a) Adjust the OCT focusing lens to ±15D ( section 6.2.22) .
(b) Check the running of the OCT focusing lens ( section 6.2.23).
(c) Check of image unstableness for focusing lens ( section 6.2.24).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-176
6.2.22 Adjustment of OCT focusing ± 15D focus

Purpose
This repair work should be done in the following case:
- when the B-scan image signal level is low because “OCT focus motor initialization error” has occurred
or the OCT focusing operation is not good.
Necessary tools
OCT focusing lens imaging check tool OCT-1-29
SONY XC-EI 50/2 (Hereinafter referred to as a CCD camera) 40423 68000

BNC-BNC 2m cable

(For OCT-1-55)
PC -
IC Capture -
When referring to the work procedures in other chapters, prepare the necessary tools in the referred chapter.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-177
Procedures
(1) Preparation
(a) Mount the Object holder and the OCT focusing lens imaging check tool onto the objective lens of the
instrument.
(b) Mount the CCD camera and the magnification lens.
(c) Launch IC capture.
CCD camera OCT focusing lens
+ Magnification lens imaging check tool
Object holder
• Calculation of the 3D OCT-1 focusing lens movement
The movement of 1DN is calculated by dividing 31.90mm by 2600DN.
(0.0123mm/DN)
• Difference between focusing lenses occurs depending on the DN value of “0D” as a
reference. The standard sensor position with “±15D” as standard, which will be used in
this chapter, is shown below.
Standard sensor position
D DN
-33 3676
-15 3035
0 2500
15 1965
40 1074
(2) Adjustment of “± 15D” focus of the OCT focusing lens.

(a) Put the tool’s lever into the groove of “-15D”.
0D
+40D
-33D
-15D +15D
(b) Execute the setting as well as “Adjustment of the 0D focus for focusing lens”.
(section 6.2.21 step (3)-(b))
(c) From the above table of sensor position, move it to the front and back of the value of -15 D to find the
position where the line becomes the narrowest.
Make sure the size does not change almost at ± 50 at the position where it can be judged to be the thinnest.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-178
(d) Tap "Position" - [Get] and confirm that the value of Sensor is the focus position adjusted in (c).
(e) Tap “-15D” at the “Correction Save” frame to save the position data.
(f) Adjust “+ 15 D” in the same way.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-179
6.2.23 Check of optical axis deviation for focusing lens

Purpose
Confirmation of deviation of optical axis of OCT focusing lens at each diopter in OCT optical system.
Necessary tools

BNC-BNC 2m cable

(For OCT-1-55)
PC -
LAN cable -
IC Capture -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-180
Procedures
(1) Preparation
(a) Mount the Object holder and the OCT focusing lens imaging check tool onto the objective lens. Set the
CCD camera.
(b) Turn on the instrument.
(c) Launch “IC Capture”.
(2) Check of optical axis deviation in focusing lens

(a) Move the lever of the OCT focusing lens imaging check tool to the “-33D” position.
• For -15D, 0D, + 15D, put it in the groove and return it to the center.
0D
+40D
-33D
-15D +15D
(b) Launch “CAN SEND TOOL”.

(c) Set the values as shown in table below.
• If changing settings of SLD Pulse and Pulse Width, set [OFF] in on/off of SLD setting.
Tab Zone Item Value

Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data Start X
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data End X Spot(2048 auto input)
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data Start Y → Set (Single)
Galvano Ctl Live-Scan data End Y
Motor Ctl 1/2 OCT Focus Motor Sensor “-33D” standard sensor
position → Move
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern
7:All points light → Set
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Bright
10:100%
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Brink
OFF
LCD Setting
Lamp Ctl Split LED Split LED OFF
Lamp Ctl SLD ON / OFF Low
* 1. Adjust the value of Level 1 until the scale of Galvano OCT optical axis adjustment check tool
becomes easy to see.
*2. Adjust the CCD camera lens aperture and “Pulse Width” to see the spot light intensity easily.
Record the default values and set the vales back to default after completing work.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-181
• Depending on the individual differences of the instruments, if -33 D, 40 D is located at

the limited position, it may not be possible to move even if you tap [Move] after
entering the amount of movement in the table below rarely. In that case, please change
the sensor position from the reference value and look for a movable position.
For the standard sensor position at each diopter value, refer to the following table.
D DN
-33 3676
-15 3035
0 2500
15 1965
40 1074

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-182
(d) After moving the sensor to the standard position, adjust to the position where the dot light source in the
smallest status is seen.
(e) Make sure that the dot light source size is not changed within ±100 in the position where the dot light
source is judged to be smallest.
(f) Read the scale in each of X and Y directions(1 scale is 0.05 mm).
Y(+)
Example)
X(+) X = -1.0
X(-) Y = -2.5
Scale in Y direction
Scale in X direction
Y(-)
(g) At “-15D”, “0D”, “+15D” and “+40D”, read the X and Y scales by the procedures of (a) to (f).
(h) Calculate the deviation amount by the following formula, check whether the moving distance is within
the standard, fill in the check sheet.
Running amount = √{(Xn-Xo)2 +(Yn-Yo)2}

n = -33D、-15D、+15D、+40D
o = 0D
Item Standard (0D position as reference) Remarks

-33D or less 0.60mm or less
±15D 0.20mm or less
+40D or less 0.25mm or less

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-183
6.2.24 Check of image unstableness for focusing lens

Purpose
Check whether the optical axis of the OCT focusing lens is deviated at each diopter value in the OCT
optical system.
Necessary Tools
SONY XC-EI50/2 (Hereinafter referred to as a CCD camera) 40423 68000

(For OCT-1-55)

BNC-BNC 2m cable
PC -
LAN cable -
IC Capture -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-184
Procedures
(1) Preparation
(a) Mount the Object holder and the OCT focusing lens imaging check tool onto the instrument. Set the
CCD camera.
(b) Turn ON the instrument.
(c) Launch IC Capture.
(2) Check of image movement caused by OCT focusing lens unit clearance.
(a) Move the lever of the OCT focusing lens imaging check tool to the “0D” position.
0D
+40D
-33D
-15D +15D
(b) Launch “CAN SEND TOOL”.

(c) Execute the setting as well as “Check of optical axis deviation for focusing lens”
(section 6.2.23 step (2)-(c))
(d) Enter the “-33D” standard sensor position and tap [Move].
(Refer to the following table.)

D DN
-33 3676
-15 3035
0 2500
15 1965
40 1074

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-185
(e) Move the OCT focusing motor to the “0D” sensor position.
(f) Read the scale in each of X and Y directions (1 scale is 0.05 mm).
(g) Make a note of the read scale as (X1, Y1).
(h) Move the OCT focusing motor to the “+40D” standard sensor position. Then perform the same work as
(g) and (h).
(i) Make a note of the read scale as (X2, Y2).
(j) Calculate the error amount by the following formula, check whether it is within the standard, and fill
out the check sheet.
Error amount =√{(X1-X2)2 +(Y1-Y2)2}

Image movement by lens unit clearance 0.1mm or less
Y(+)
X(+)
X(-)
Scale in Y direction
Scale in X direction
Y(-)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-186
6.2.25 Scan length adjustment

Purpose
Adjustment with scan length issue or scan line, After interference adjustment/After polarization controller
adjustment/After replacement of Galvano mirror unit for repair
*Adjust the OCT scan length of 0 Diopter and record/confirm the corrected value.
Necessary tools
Scan length 0D tool OCT-1-19

(hereinafter called scan tool)

(FastMap installed)
LAN cable -
Maestro2_CCDShift -
*Cautions before adjustment

• The compensation for the split ( section “6.2.12~14”), TRC focusing ( section “6.2.11”), OCT
focusing ( section “6.2.21~24”) and polarization controller ( section “6.2.32”) must be finished in
advance.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-187
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach the scan tool to the Object holder.
Object holder
Scan tool
(b) Connect the main unit to PC with a LAN cable.

(d) Launch “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe” on PC.
• If the program does not work (in case of the first trial), execute
“RegistImageAlignment.bat”.
• Make sure that the registration setting is completed normally.
• Do NOT execute “UnregistImageAlignment.bat”.
(e) Click [Fundus] in “Maestro2_CCDShift2” on PC; the main unit is standby to capture.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-188
(f) Click [set scan length] in ｢Maestro2_CCDShift2｣ dialog box.

Screen of scan length adjustment will be open.
(g) Scan length adjustment screen opens.
Screen of scan
length adjustment
(h) Set “3D Macula 6.0×6.0mm” of the capture icon.

i Tap [3D macula 6.0×6.0mm] in ｢page 1/9｣ of the Serviceman mode.
ii Tap [Edit Capture].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-189
iii Select Scan Size [6.0×6.0mm] and Scan Resolution [256×256] from drop down menu respectively.
Then tap [OK.]
(2) Confirmation of the scan length (6.0×6.0mm)

(a) Tap ｢3D Macula 6.0×6.0mm｣.
(b) Rotate the scan tool and make the horizontal scan of OCT parallel to the scale of the scan tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-190
(c) Tap in the following order [Advance], [Manual], and [▲], or turn the screw of the reference mirror
counterclockwise to move up an interference figure. (Refer to the interference figure position shown
below.)
Screw of reference mirror
Rotate the scan tool and

make the horizontal
(d) Click ｢capture｣ in Maestro2_CCDShift on PC.
*[Capture START] on the main unit does not work.
(e) Confirm that the lengths of horizontal (X) axis and vertical (Y) axis shown in the capture figure are
6.0mm.
6.0mm
X axis
6.0mm
One scale unit is 0.1mm.
Y axis
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Scale on X axis
Within 6.0 mm ± 5% One scale unit is 0.1mm.
Scale on Y axis

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-191
(f) If the lengths of X and Y axes are not 6.0mm, change the corrected value of ｢X 6.0mm｣ and ｢Y
6.0mm｣. Then click [capture] again in CCDShift on PC.
Repeat (d) and (f) until the scan length is 6.0mm.
*Adjustment of the scan length

Scan length increase
→ decrease the corrected value
Scan length decrease

→ increase the corrected value
(g) Write down the corrected value｢X 6.0mm｣ and ｢Y 6.0mm｣ and click [MENU] of the main unit
display.
(3) Confirmation of the scan length (X axis 12.0mm)

(a) Tap ｢3D Wide (H) 12.0×9.0mm｣.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-192
(b) Tap in the following order [Advance], [Manual], and [▲], or turn the screw of reference mirror
counterclockwise to move up the interference figure. (Refer to the interference figure position shown
below.)
(c) Click ｢capture｣ in Maestro2_CCDShift on PC.

* [Capture START] on the main unit does not work.
(d) Confirm that the length of horizontal (X) axis shown in the capture figure is 12.0 mm.
• When the periphery of the image is dark, it is possible to display the scale of the
peripheral part brightly by moving it so that the center part of the interference image
folds back in (2).
X axis
12.0m
12.0mm
One
One scale
scale unit
unit
is 0.1mm.
is 0.1mm.
Y axis
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Scale on X axis Within 12.0 mm ± 5% One scale unit is 0.1mm.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-193
(e) If the lengths of X axes are not 12.0mm, change the corrected value of ｢X 12.0mm｣. Then click
[capture] again in CCDShift on PC.
Repeat (c) and (e) until the scan length is 12.0mm.


(f) Write down the corrected value ｢X 12.0mm｣ and click [MENU] of the main unit display.
(4) Confirmation of the scan length (Y axis 9.0mm)

(a) Tap ｢3D Wide 12.0×9.0mm｣.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-194
(b) Tap in the following order [Advance], [Manual], and [▲], or turn the screw of reference mirror
counterclockwise to move up an interference figure. (Refer to the interference figure position shown
below.)
(c) Click ｢capture｣ in Maestro2_CCDShift on PC.
*[Capture START] on the main unit does not work.
(d) Confirm that the length of vertical (Y) axis shown in the capture figure is 9.0 mm.
9.0mm X axis
One scale unit

is 0.1mm.
Y axis
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Scale on Y axis Within 9.0 mm ± 5% One scale unit is 0.1mm.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-195
(e) If the length of Y axis is not 9.0mm, change the corrected value of ｢Y 9.0mm｣. Then click [capture]
again in Maestro2_CCDShift on PC.
Repeat (c) and (e) until the scan length is 9.0mm.


(f) Write down the corrected value ｢X 9.0mm｣ and click [MENU] of the main unit display.
(5) Save the corrected value.

(a) Click [save setting] in CCDShift on PC.
(b) Click [Yes] on confirmation pop-up window.

Click [OK] on message pop-up window.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-196
(6) Check of the written data

Check if the data sent from “Maestro2_CCDShift.exe” is written in the instrument.
(a) Start up the Tool Mode.
(b) Tap [Back] or [Next] to access the ｢page 8/9｣.
(c) Confirm the corrected value in ｢GALVANO ADJUSTMENT｣.
(7) Carry out “CCD shift adjustment” (section 6.2.29).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-197
6.2.26 Adjustment of the internal fixation LCD position

Purpose
Replacement of Internal Fixation unit(1024725-01), failure (missing dot), repair for the positioning error
of the internal fixation.
Necessary Tools
Internal fixation focus check tool OCT-1-07
Galvano OCT optical axis adjustment check tool (galvano OCT-1-16

tool)

*Used to tighten the tapping screw
With M2/M2.5/M3 bit
VESSEL No.AC161100

BNC-BNC 2m cable
SONY XC-EI50/2 40423 68000
Diopter telescope SL-01

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-198

(For OCT-1-55)
IC Capture.exe -
Procedure
(1) Replacing the internal fixation unit (Internal Fixation unit(1024725-01))
If the number of missing dots on the existing internal fixation unit is out of guidelines, replace the internal
fixation unit with the following procedure.
Item Standard Notes
Internal fixation unit Number of missing dots in 5 × 5 -
pixels: 5 or less
(a) Confirmation before replacing the internal fixation unit

i Remove the existing internal fixation cable from the J239 connector of TRC_M2 - PCB (1022959 - 01)
and connect the substitute internal fixation unit.
ii Turn on the main unit and make the following settings with CAN SEND TOOL.
Tab Zone Item Value
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern All points light → Set
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Bright 100% → Set
LCD Setting
LCD Setting
iii Check that the number of missing dots is within the standard (see standard above).
In case of NG, prepare another substitute internal fixation unit.
(b) Turn off the main unit and replace the internal fixation unit (section 6.1.35).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-199
(2) Preparation for adjustment

(b) Launch “CAN SEND TOOL”. Then set the following setting.
Tab Zone Item Value
Motor Ctl 1/2 TRC-OCT Focus Move 0D
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Patern 7:All points light → Set
LCD Setting
Fixation Ctl Internal/External Fixation Bright 100% → Set
LCD Setting
LCD Setting

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-200
(c) Looking into the objective lens, check missing dots and dirt in internal fixation.
(d) Set " Fixation Ctl "-" Internal / External Fixation LCD Setting "-" Patern " to [5: Cross].
(e) Install the galvano tool, CCD camera, the parts related with camera shooting.
Galvano tool
CCD camera

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-201
(3) Adjustment of the internal fixation LCD position

(a) Adjust the Internal fixation LCD with the center of Galvano scale.
(b) Confirm the displacement and inclination referring to the standard below.
Item Standard
Displacement Within 1/4 of internal fixation width in upper, lower, right and left
directions (within ϕ0.05mm）
Inclination The difference between right and left within 1/5 of the internal
fixation width at the outermost rectangular scale position in the
upper and lower direction on the monitor screen (within 45’)
Displacement
Adjust the position

shift and the
inclination by
positioning f the
internal fixation unit
Inclination
• If the scale is not clear, adjust the contrast in ICcapture software.
(c) Perform the coarse adjustment with the setting in the “Location” column of the “Fixation Ctl” tab and
perform the fine adjustments in the “Fixation Center” column.
After positioning, tap [Save].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-202
(d) Tighten the two screws CR2×8S-FW 3BZn with torque of 30cNm by using a torque screwdriver and
apply the screw locking agent to the screw heads.
(e) Remove the camera and galvano tool.
CR2×8S-FW 3BZn (2 pcs.)

Apply the TA lock.
(4) Check of the internal fixation focus

(a) Attach the Internal fixation focus check tool, set to 0 of the tool scale.
Internal fixation focus check tool
Diopter telescope
(b) Adjust focus of the Diopter telescope by your own eye.

(c) Using Diopter telescope operate the scale of inter fixation focus check tool to adjust the focus of green
cross of internal fixation . Confirm the difference of the internal fixation focus within the following
standard.
Item Standard
Focus difference Within ±0.26D
(Within 1.9mm range of the tool eyepiece outer diameter)
(d) Remove the internal fixation focus check tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-203
6.2.27 Adjustment of the aperture selector unit position

Purpose
Correspondence at the occurrence of flare, replacement of illumination light (IR LED), repair due to
malfunction of the aperture selector unit (LIGHT SOURCE UNIT (1024779-01)).
Necessary tools
Aperture adjustment telescope OCT-1-39
USB Cable A-B type OCT-1-57
SONY XC-EI50/2 40423 68000

(For OCT-1-55)

(Connect with PC => Launch the tool software “IC capture
exe”)
IC capture.exe -
Pen light (LED light) -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-204
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Remove the cover ( section 6.1.4)
(b) Remove the CN7 cable of OCT_IMG - BOARD (with latch on the back side), LAN cable of CN 1
(with latch on the back side), camera link cable, and "2 screws fixing the sheet metal".

CN1
CN7
Loosen the screws on both sides and

remove the camera link cable
(c) Loosen the two screws as shown in the figure below, rotate the plate 90 degrees, and fix with the one
screw removed in (b).
Fasten with screws
(d) Remove the two screws and remove the light shielding sheet metal.
(e) Remove the J271, J265 cable of TRC_M2-PCB.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-205
(f) Remove the six screws and remove the light shielding sheet metal.

to fix the clip
(g) Remove the split unit J 290, J 291, internal fixation cable.
(h) Remove the three screws and remove the split unit.
(i) Remove the J225 cable on the back side of the split unit.
(2) Replace the aperture selector unit

(a) Removal Xenon Lamp
i Remove the connector connected to the Xenon lamp.
ii Loosen the screw with a flathead screwdriver and slide the Xenon lamp to the left to remove it.
Loosen the screw, slide it to the left and remove it

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-206
(b) Removal of aperture selector unit

i Remove two screws and hexagon screws and remove the aperture selector unit.
• In addition to screws, the aperture selector unit is fixed with a dustproof sponge attached
to sheet metal, so remove it so as not to scratch it.
It is fixed with
a sponge.
(c) Place an alternative aperture selector unit on the lower right side of the mirror body and temporarily fix
it with two screws and hexagonal screws.
Tighten the two screws
CR3×8S-FW 3BZn temporarily.
Light up Illumination aperture by

penlight LED.
Place white paper at the right side and
illuminate with light source.
(d) Attach the Aperture adjustment telescope and the CCD camera onto the objective lens.
CCD camera
Aperture adjustment telescope

(OCT-1-55)
Power supply
AC DC-700 EI 50 CCD Cam Launch PC application software
Power (4042368000) IC Capture.exe.
Observe the CCD image.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-207
(e) Adjust the focus of Aperture adjustment telescope to the cornea aperture(step (5)).
(f) Check the cornea aperture inside diameter within standard.
If it is outside the standard, readjustment of ELBOW MODULE (1019967-01) is necessary, so it will be
returned to TOPCON for repair.
Standard
Item Standard Note
Cornea aperture inside diameter Φ3.3mm±0.1mm
(3) Adjustment
(a) Position adjustment of Light source unit
i Turn on the main unit.
ii In the CAN SEND TOOL turn on internal fixation.
「Fixation Ctl」 - 「Internal/External Fixation LCD Setting」 - 「Patern」 - 「7: All Points Light」→[Set]
「Fixation Ctl」 - 「Internal/External Fixation LCD Setting」 - 「Bright」 - 「10: 100%」→[Set]
iii Adjust the focus of Aperture adjustment telescope to the iris aperture (Estimated focus position step(5)).
iv Adjust Light source unit position so that the position of the iris aperture image sets to the “0” of scale
center.
v Adjust the tilt so that the hanging line of the hole mirror mask enters into the thick hanging line of the
iris diaphragm and tighten the two screws and hexagon screws.
Fit the focus of the telescope to the iris aperture.
Adjust the unit position to set the iris aperture image position.
Then tighten the two screws.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-208
In the CAN SEND TOOL

Turn on internal fixation
Thereby being visible
Iris aperture
Suspension wire
[Standard] (Scale 1: 0.1mm)

Item Standard Note
Eccentricity of the iris Within ±0.025 in X component against the scale Maximum value of
aperture center XY vector synthesis:
Within ±0.025 in Y component against the scale 0.035 mm from the
center scale center
Iris aperture outside diameter ϕ5.2mm±0.1mm Calculated diameter
If not within standard, repeat adjustment.
Calculate example: offset X=0.1 Y=0.05

eccentricity =√(0.12+0.052)=0.112

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-209
(b) Measurement confirmation of the crystalline lens aperture (normal pupil)

i Focus Aperture adjustment telescope to the crystalline lens aperture (Estimated focus positionstep(5)).
It is not possible to do the adjustment for the unit exchanged.
ii Confirm the diameter (outside) and the eccentricity amount of the crystalline lens aperture.
If not within standard, repeat the light source unit position adjustment.
If it is still not good even after adjusting and checking again, replace the LIGHT SOURCE UNIT
(1024779-01).
Focus Focusing plumb line check tool to the crystalline lens aperture
crystalline lens
aperture
(Normal)
[Standard] (Scale 1: 0.1mm)

Item Standard Note
Eccentricity of the crystalline Within 0.12mm in XY vector synthesis Against the iris
lens aperture (Normal) aperture
Crystalline lens aperture ϕ 4.3mm±0.1mm calculated diameter
outside diameter direction of Y

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-210
(4) Reference
• The positional relationship between aperture and focus differs with the actual eye
structure.
Cornea aperture
Focus position (estimate)

[Objective lens side]
Item Standard
Cornea aperture Φ3.3mm±0.1mm
inside diameter
Iris aperture

[Camera side]
Item Standard
Iris aperture outside Φ5.2mm±0.1mm
diameter (Triton)
Lens aperture

[Central]
Item Standard
Lens aperture inside Φ4.3mm±0.1mm
diameter
Cornea aperture
In the CAN SEND TOOL
Turn on internal fixation
Thereby being visible
Iris aperture
Lens aperture

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-211
6.2.28 Adjustment of Spectrometer and Line CCD

Purpose
This adjustment of the purpose is to replace the Fiber Unit (1012872-01 FIBER ASSWMBLY),
the Line CCD (1010621-01 CCDCAMERA), repair of the Y-axis of the spectrometer, and
resolution of the tomographic image may deteriorate. (2013)
Necessary tools
Focus slide tool of the Fourier transform lens OCT-1-14
with M2/M2.5/M3 bit

Spectro scope Holder Plate OCT-1-66
(CR3x8S-SW + FW-Ni) 4 lines supplied
Line CCD extension cable 1032054-01
Fiber cleaner OCT-1000-05
LAN cable -
3DOCT-1_GraphTool.exe -
In other procedures referenced in the text, prepare the required tools in the referenced chapter.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-212
Procedure
(1) Preparation
• Set to "Motor Ctl 2/2"-"XYZ Motor"-"Y" to about 1000 (reference) with CAN SEND
Tool and let the main unit go up to prevent interfereing the procedure from (a)-(vi)
(a) Removing the Spectroscope

i Mount the spectrometer holder (small) with one screw.
Spectro scope Holder Plate (small)
ii Mount the spectroscope holder (large) with two screws.
Spectro scope Holder Plate (large)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-213
iii Remove the fiber patch.
• Attach caps to the fiber patches and connections on the purpose of dust and dirt protection.
iv Remove the camera link cable and two clamp screws connected to the OCT_IMG_Board.
Camera link cable
Clamp screw

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-214
v Remove the L_CCD_POW cables connecting the Line CCD and OCT_PCB (J213).
OCT PCB(J213)
vi Remove the screw (1) that is fixed to the spectroscope.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-215
vii Lift the spectroscope up, remove the hook of sheet metal, slide it sideways, and remove it.
• Be careful not to damage Line CCD heatsinks, folding mirrors, etc. due to interferences
against the instrument.
Lift the spectrometer and remove the hook.
Remove the hook and slide it sideways.
viii Place it on the spectroscope holder and fix it with one screw.
Spectro scope Holder Plate

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-216
ix Install the fiber patch removed in the previous step (iii).

• Maske sure to clean the tip of the fiber with a fiber cleaner when attaching it.
• Connect the fiber patch and the groove of the connector together.
Connect the grooves together.
Fiber patch Connection
x Mount the camera link cable is removed in the previous step (iv) and then attach it. (Torque 18 cN·m)
• On mounting it, Use the torque driver with the ensure clearance among the
OCT_IMG_Board.
Connect the cable to the near side.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-217
xi Connect to the part removed in the previous step (v) using the line CCD extension cable.
OCT_PCB(J213)
Line CCD extension cable
(2) Line CCD adjustments

(a) Start 3DOCT-1_GraphTool.exe.
(b) Enter “User Name” and “Password”, then click [OK].

(c) Enter “User Name” and “Password”, then click [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-218
(d) After the following screen is displayed, choose [OCT+Fundus] from the drop down list and click [Scan
Start].
(e) Start CAN SEND TOOL.

(f) Confirm SLD settings.
• SLD on/off is High
• SLD Pulse is Blinking
• Set DAC LEVEL and Pulse Width to the right value.
(g) Stop the galvano by clicking GL-STOP of Graph Tool.
(3) Adjustment
(a) Getting peak temporarily
• Adjust the waveform to become a peak using the turn of the Y-axis motor and the Fourier transform lens
focus (see figure below).
• When waveform exceeds the upper limit, adjust to become a peak at nearly 639 using MVOA (see
figure below).
• When adjusting MVOA, adjust to the peak using Y-axis motor and the Fourier transform lens focus.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-219
When waveform exceeds the upper limit,

adjust MVOA.
Click [GL-STOP]
Adjust to become a peak at nearly 639

using MVOA
Adjust the waveform using the Y-axis motor

and the Fourier transform lens focus.
MVO

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-220
(4) Adjustment of line CCD rotation

(a) Loosen the two 6S3×8S-SW+FW_3BZn screws with washers and then adjust to be the waveform
maximized in two peaks.
(b) Adjust the line CCD, so that the two peaks fall at the same time when pushing the fiber.
(Conditions that one peak falls earlier then another and waveform is disordered are NG.)
Loosen two 6S3×8S-SW+FW_3BZn

and then adjust by rotation.
Press lightly
※When push the limit of fiber, adjust the
downward of mountain as same with double
hump.
(the decline of pair hump and the strange hump
are no good.)
(5) Adjustment of the line CCD horizontal direction

(a) Adjust the line CCD in the horizontal direction, so that either side of the waveform becomes equal.
(b) When adjusting in the horizontal direction, slide if hitting against the lower pin.
(c) When the horizontal direction adjustment shifts the rotation adjustment of the previous steps, adjust
once again by the rotation adjustment.
The peak of the first mountain

matches the third vertical line.
Either side of waveform

becomes equal
Loosen two 6S3×8S-SW+FW_3BZn and then

Line CCD pixel full length adjust in the horizontal direction

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-221
(6) Fixing the Fourier transform lens and line CCD

(a) Tighten S3×8S-SW+FW_3Zn screws with washer with torque of 90cNm at the two positions to fix the
Fourier transform lens.
(b) Tighten S3×8S-SW+FW_3Zn screws with washers with torque of 90cNm at the four positions to fix
the line CCD.
(c) Apply the screw locking agent to the screws.
Tighten S3×8S-SW+FW_3Zn with torque of

90cNm at two positions.
Apply the screw locking agent.
S3 × 8 S-SW + FW_3BZn 4 locations

Tighten with 90 cN
Attach the TA lock
The lower screw at the back is inserted
through the hole in the back.
(7) Fixation of the Y axis and mounting the Y axis center plate
(a) Turn the ball plunger by half of the rotation after hitting Y axis and fix it with the nut.
(b) Mount Y axis center board in the 90-degree position to the stopper.
(c) Apply the TA lock to each screw.
Y axis center board
Ball Plunger 90 degrees
TA lock

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-222
(8) Setting and the confirmation of the output value

(a) Confirm that the SLD is Blinking.
(b) Adjust MVOA for the value of Graph Tool[P1S] to become 700±10.
(c) Click Graph Tool[Y Auto(YD)] and confirm that [Y-Peak] becomes 700±70.
Repeat confirmation five times and make sure that it is entirely within the standard value.
MVOA
Adjust 700±10 in
P1S column
Y-Peak
700±70
(9) Mount the Spectroscope

(a) Mount the spectroscope with the reverse procedure of the previous steps (1)-(a).
• When the fiber patch is removed, Attach the cap to the fiber patch and the connector to
prevent dust and dirt.
• Make sure to clean the fiber tip with a fiber cleaner when attaching a fiber patch.
• On mounting it, Use the torque driver with the ensure clearance among the
OCT_IMG_Board.
(b) Remove the spectroscope holder (large) and (small).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-223
6.2.29 CCD shift

Purpose
Correction of position difference of Fundus image and Projection image, scan line, or After
replacement of GALVANO_UNIT (47010 68500) at Galvano error, After replacement of
L_CCD_CAM_E2V (1010621-01) and After replacement of Fiber unit(1024458-01 FIBER -
MODULE)
Necessary tools
Scan length 0D tool OCT-1-19
Maestro2_CCDShift -
LAN cable -
Prepare other necessary tools which are described in the reference chapter.
*Cautions before adjustment

To complete the below adjustment.
• The focus adjustment with the position of observation camera ( section “6.2.8”)
• The compensation for the split ( section “6.2.12~14”),
• TRC focusing ( section “6.2.11”), OCT focusing ( section “6.2.21-24”)
• The adjustment of OCT scan length ( section “6.2.25”).
• The adjustment of polarization controller ( section “6.2.32”)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-224
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach Scan length 0D tool to the Object holder.
Object holder
Scan length 0D tool
(b) Connect the main unit and the PC with the LAN cable.
(d) Launch “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe”.
• If the program does not work (in case of the first trial), execute
“RegistImageAlignment.bat”.
• Make sure that the registration setting is completed normally.
• Do not execute UnregistImageAlignment.bat.
(e) After Maestro2_CCDShift is activated, click on the [Fundus], the body will be ready for shooting.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-225
(f) Tap the [3D Macula].

Photographing icon Scan size Scan resolution OCT focus position
3D Macula 6.0×6.0mm 256×256 Vitreous
(g) Adjust the rotation of tool using interference image.

i Tap [Advance] - [Manual].
Rotating the scan length 0D tool, set

the scan line arrow parallel with scale
ii Rotate the lead screw counterclockwise and move the interference image up.
iii Rotating the Scan length 0D tool, set the scan line parallel with horizontal scale of the tool.
Lead screw of reference mirror

Adjust the rotation of tool
using interference image
Set scan line parallel with scale

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-226
(h) Carry out the positioning of the tool.

i Click [adjusting criterion] on “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe”.
ii Click [capture].
iii Confirm that the green line aligns to the scale of the tool.
*If not, rotate the tool so that the green line aligns to the scale of the tool. Then shoot again.
iv Click [OK] after check.
(iii) Confirm that the green line

aligns to the scale of the tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-227
(2) Measure the angle using IR observation image and the color photography image.
(a) Click [angle measurement] on “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe”.
(b) Select “IR”, then click [Capture].
Select “IR”, then click [Capture].
Ex.) IR image
(c) Measure the angle moving the pointer to “±5” position on the horizontal scale of the tool.
• Use click motion on the mouse to move the image / pointer.
• Use the wheel on the mouse to magnify / reduce size of the image.
(d) Confirm the angle is within the standard in the table below.
If NG, carry out the angle adjustment of the Basler camera.
Item Standard Notes
Angle 0°(360°)±2° -
Move the pointer to (5,0)(-5,0) The angle will be displayed.

position on the horizontal scale The angle is less than 2° from horizontal.
of the tool (set the pointer to
the dark part on the scale).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-228
(e) Select “Color”, then click [Capture].

• Capture after lighting up the scan length 0D tool using LED light in purpose to increase
the capture light intensity.
Use LED light
Select “Color”, then click [Capture] Ex.) Color image
(f) Measure the angle moving the pointer to “±5” position on the horizontal scale of the tool.
• Use click motion on the mouse to move the image / pointer.
• Use the wheel on the mouse to magnify / reduce size of the image.
(g) Confirm the angle is within the standard in the table below.
If NG, carry out the angle adjustment of the Basler camera.
Item Standard Notes
Angle 0°(360°)±2° -
(h) Click [OK] after check.
The angle will be displayed.

Move the pointer to (5,0)(-5,0)
The angle is less than 2° from horizontal.
position on the horizontal scale of
the tool (set the pointer to the dark
part on the scale).
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-229
(3) Adjustment of CCD shift

(a) Adjust the position and size of the IR image projection.
i Click [size positioning] on “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe” .
ii Select “IR”, then click [Capture].
Select “IR”, then click [Capture].
iii After IR projection is shown, adjust the position and the size.
Set the captured IR projection by mouse pointer, then match to scale of background by dragging.
iv Since it is necessary to check the position / size correction value in the subsequent procedure, record the
data.
The shape of the cursor will be Align the scale of the background
changed to allow the adjustment. and the scale of the projection.
Correction value for the

position and size

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-230
(b) Adjust the position and size of the color image projection.
i Select “Color”, then click [Capture].
• Capture after lighting up the scan length 0D tool using LED light in purpose to increase
the capture light intensity.
Select “Color”, then click [Capture].
ii After Color projection is shown, adjust the position and size.

Set the captured Color projection by mouse pointer, then match to scale of background by dragging.
iii Make a note of the position / size correction value after adjustment, and click [OK].
The shape of the cursor will be Align the scale of the background
changed to allow the adjustment. and the scale of the projection.
Correction value for the

position and size

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-231
(4) Memorizing the correction data

(a) Click [send adjust data] on “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe” to send the data to the main body.
(b) When the dialog box as shown below is displayed, click [OK].
(5) Check of the written data

Check if the data sent from “Maestro2_CCDShift2.exe” is written in the instrument.
(a) Start up the Serviceman Mode.
(b) Tap the [Back] or [Next] to access page 8/9.
(c) Tap [CCD Shift (color)] and [CCD Shift (mono)] and confirm each value.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-232
(6) Confirm the correction motion.

(b) Carry out 3D shooting on “IMAGEnet6” to confirm that the displayed scan range corresponds to the
scale of the tool.
Photographing icon Scan size Scan resolution OCT focus position
3D Macula 6.0×6.0mm 256×256 Vitreous
The error at center should be within 1 division.
(7) Finalization
(a) Turn OFF the main body.
(b) Remove the tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-233
6.2.30 Rescaling
Purpose
Calibration after replacement of fiber unit(1024458-01 FIBER-MODULE), Line CCD(1010621-01
L_CCD_CAM_E2V).
Necessary tools
Mirror tool OCT-1-20
main_rescale2Exe -
CalibrationMakeTool -
USB memory -
• When the operation described in this section is carried out, confirm in advance that the
interference sensitivity meets the standard ( section 6.2.32).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-234
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attach the tools.
i Attach the Mirror tool to the Object holder.
Object holder
Mirror tool
(b) Launch 3DOCT-1_GraphTool.exe.
(c) Enter “User Name” and “Password”, then click [OK].

(d) Enter [Input Light Power] value, then click [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-235
(e) After the following screen is displayed, choose [OCT+Fundus] from the drop down list and click [Scan
Start].
(f) launch CAN SEND TOOL.

(g) Confirm SLD settings.
• SLD on/off is High.
• SLD Pulse is Blinking.
• Set DAC LEVEL and Pulse Width to the right value.
(h) Confirm 0 diopter at position of TRC Foucs lens.
(i) Description of the display of Graph Tool S/W and setting for rescaling
③ ④

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-236
No. Display, etc. Function Setting for rescaling/Not used

① Signal[start] to [end] Z search range [pix.] of the interference [20] to [850]
signal peaks of Amplitude and Power
Noise[start] to [end] Z range [pix.] of the noises of Amplitude [850] to [900]
and Power. when the signal peak
Interference Can be changed as needed position is Z=20 to 600.
depending of the signal peak position.
*Addition of the default
Only if a ghost signal is included, the value
can be changed into [start] to [Start+50]
between 800 and 900. [450] to [500] when
the signal peak position is Z=601 to 1023.
Pickup Line Select A-scan to display in Spectral [512] to [512]
[left] to [right] Intensity.
When [left] is equivalent to [right], select
that A-scan.
When [left] is not equivalent to [right], select
the average of A-scans in that range.
Spectrum Select the display range of the horizontal [0] to [2047]
[X-Min] to [X-max] axis of Spectral Intensity.
Spectrum Select the display range of the vertical axis [0] to [1023]
[Y-Min] to [Y-max] of Spectral Intensity .
Amp(linear) Select the display range of the vertical axis [0] to [1023]
[X-Min] to [X-max] of Amplitude.
Amp(linear) Select the display range of the vertical axis [0] to [90000]
[Y-Min] to [Y-max] of Amplitude.
Power(log) Select the display range of the vertical axis [0] to [1023]
[X-Min] to [X-max] of Power.
Power(log) Select the display range of the vertical axis [0] to [110]
[Y-Min] to [Y-max] of Power.
② [Y Auto(YD)] button Normal processing of the spectroscope Y Be sure to click first
axis auto immediately after starting
S/W. Also perform it as
needed.
[Y Check] button All-range search processing of the [2]
[ ]Step spectroscope Y axis auto
Scale[x1] [x2] ON/OFF of Zero-padding processing at the [x8]
[x4] [x8] button time of FFT
[GL-START] button ON/OFF of galvano scan [GL-Stop] button
[GL-STOP] button
③ Rescaling; ON/OFF of rescaling and selection of the ☑
[LI]/[CS]-[x2] interpolation method. [LI] is linear Press the [LI] button.
interpolation. [CS] is spline interpolation.
[CS]-[x2] is interpolation with twice as high
accuracy as [CS].
□Window Function ON/OFF of the window function at the time ☑
of FFT processing
□Disp Comp; Numerical dispersion compensation ☑
(QM)[Modify] button ON/OFF Do not press the [Modify]
button.
2nd [ ], 3rd [ ] Secondary and tertiary coefficients of 2nd [-10], 3rd [0]
numerical dispersion compensation *Calculate the optimal values
unique to the device and
change these values.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-237
[Search] button ON/OFF of search for the optimal values of Press the [Search] button.
the secondary and tertiary coefficients of
dispersion compensation
[Vit-R] and [Cho-N] At the time of Vitreous/Choroidal mode, Press the [Vit-R] button.
buttons change each parameter display column.
Used when creating rescaling data.
Average[ ]times N number of each value (average value) in [100]
blue
④ Dispersion compensation Search for the optimal values of Search for the optimal values
the secondary and tertiary coefficients of of the secondary and tertiary
dispersion compensation (Only when the coefficients of dispersion
[Search] button of (13) is pressed.) compensation
Live display of the dispersion compensation
status (only when the [Monitor] button of
(13) is pressed)
(2) Creation of data for rescaling.

(a) Select [Vit-R] mode to set the reference mirror to “Vitreous (Reverse)”
(b) Adjust the return light quantity for Probe system to maximum position moving the micro head for X, Y,
Z direction ( section 6.2.32).
At the same time, adjust the PeakZ:40, Sens avg: more than 94, Y-Peak: within 700±10%.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-238
• It is impossible to execute rescaling normally when capture the Reference data in case of
the coherent signal is out of the display area as the diagram below.
In that case, adjust the MVOA and move the graph into the frame.
After adjustment, confirm that it meets the standard of (b).
Example Rescaling NG(step(3)-(l))
MVOA
(c) Set the ND filter light shielding position to capture the Reference data.
ND15 ND0.1 Light shielding position

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-239
(d) Set "Directory" of "Data Store", enter "res0000" in "File Name" field and click [Save Spec].
• After entering "Directory" and "File Neme", be sure to press [Enter] within each text box.
Input 「Directory」and「File Name」 Click「Save Spec」
(e) Adjust the reference mirror position so that “Peak Z” is “120 depth” through the ND filter(ND0.1) of
the mirror tool.
 Set the file name to “res0120”. Click [Save Spec].
(f) Adjust the reference mirror position so that “Peak Z” is set to “120 depth”. Create the file for the same
operation.
 Use the file name with each adjusted “Peak Z” value.
(g) The operation to get data and store data is completed in “Vitreous (Reverse)” mode.
The spectrum data for “Vitreous (Reverse)”

and “Choroidal (Normal)”will be stored in the
(Fig. 1) created folder.
(h) Select “Cho-N (Choroidal (Normal))” mode to set the reference mirror to “Choroidal (Normal)”.
Reverse the sign of the value entered in “2nd” of Graph tool to Vitreous (Reverse) mode.
Ex.) If it was "- 9.4", change it to "9.4".
Repeat in the same manner as Vitreous (Reverse) mode.

(i) Set the mirror tool to prevent any lights coming to the inside for the correct photography of Reference
data.
(j) Input “Directory” and “File Name” in “Data Store” section, then click [Save Spec].
 File Name should be “res0000”.
(k) Adjust the reference mirror position so that “Peak Z” is “120 depth” through the ND filter(ND0.1) of
the mirror tool.
 Set the file name to “res0120.dat”. Click [Save Spec].
(l) Adjust the reference mirror position so that “Peak Z” is set to “120 depth”. Create the file for the same
operation.
 Use the file name with each adjusted “Peak Z” value.
(m) The operation to get data and store data is completed in “Vitreous (Reverse)” mode.
(n) The spectrum data for “Vitreous (Reverse)” and “Choroidal (Normal)”will be stored in the created
folder (refer to “Fig. 1”).
(o) Close the “OCT Graph tool”.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-240
(3) Creating of rescaling

(a) Execute “main_rescale2.vi”.
(b) Set “Number of A-line” to “1024”.
(c) Click [Subtraction mode] to set “Active”.
(d) Click the [(reference)] button in “Base directory”.
(d) Click the

[(reference)] button.
(b) Set to “1024”.
(c) Set “Active”.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-241
(e) Select the folder for spectrum data which were stored in step (2), then click “Current folder”.
 At first, create “Calibration Data” in “Vitreous (Reverse)” mode” (refer to description below).
(f) Change [➡(Running)] to [⇨(Execution)] by clicking [●], then click [⇨(Execution)].
Ex.) Vitreous (Reverse) mode
(e) Select the folder for spectrum

C:\SpecCalib\Inst_SN0001\Vit_R
(e) Click “Current folder”.
(f) Click.
(g) Select “res0000.dat” file, click [OK].
(g) Select file, click [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-242
(h) Select all files except “res0000.dat”, then click [OK].
( h ) Select all files except “res0000.dat”,

then click [OK].
(i) Select “Spectrum Data” tab. The loaded files will be displayed.
(i) “Spectrum Data” tab

(i) The loaded files will be displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-243
(j) Select “Spectrum graph”. The spectrum of “res0000.dat” ~ “res0320.dat” will be displayed.
(k) Select “Filtering parameter” tab.

i Click [Set parameter] to set to “active”.
ii Set “Window” to “None”.
iii Set “Select signal ID” to “1”.
iv Set “Delay” and “Width” to select the distribution area with no noise so that the peak value can be
observed around “240Depth” area.
v Press [OK].
(k)“Filtering parameter” tab
(iii) Set to “1”.
(iv) Set “Delay” and “Width”.
(v) Click “OK”.
(ii) Set to “None”.

(i) Set to “active”.
vi Change “Select signal ID” to “0”.

vii Set “Delay” and “Width” to select the distribution area with no noise so that the peak value can be
observed around “120Depth” area.
viii Click “OK”.
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-244
(l) The screen will be changed to “Fitting result” tab.

i Set “polynomial order” to “4”.
ii Set the value of “Fitting range” to the same one as “Position of half of maximum”.
(l)”Filtering result” tab
(i)Set to “4”.
(ii) Set to the same value as “Position of half of

maximum”.
iii Check that the graph of "Fitting result" is going upward to the right and the value of "Fitting error" is
"about 0.0001 (1.0E - 4)" or less.
(iii) Graph for “Fitting result” is

continuously increasing.
(ⅲ) Close to “0.0001”

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-245
iv Click “Save calibration data” to set to “Active”.

v Click “STOP”.
(iv) Set to “Active”.
(v) Click “STOP”.
(m) Input “Rescale_Vit-R_SNxxxxxx” in “file name” box, then click [OK].

(xxxxxx is the serial number of the instrument)
(m) Input “Rescale_Vit-R SNxxxxxx”. (m) Click [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-246
(n) “Calibration Data” will be stored in “Vit-R” folder.

• As an option, if you want to save a "text file", enter a .txt extension like "Rescsle_Vit -
R.txt" at the first input, save a text file containing a number between "0.0 - 1.0" (refer to
Fig. 2).
(n) “Calibration Data” will be

stored in “Vit-R” folder.
・・・(Option)
・
(Fig.2) ・
・
(n) Input “Rescsle_Vit-R.txt”, when the

data is stored as text file. The data
from “0.0” to “1.0” will be stored
(o) The operation of “Calibration Data” is completed in “Vitreous (Reverse)” mode.

Close “main_rescale2.vi”

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-247
(p) Next create “Calibration Data” in “Choroidal (Normal)” mode. Follow the procedure below.
Execute “main_rescale2.vi”.
(q) Select the spectrum data, which were created in step (2), then click [Current folder].
(r) Click “ “.
Ex.) Choroidal(Normal) mode
(q) Select the folder for spectrum data

Ex.) C:\SpecCalib\Inst_SN0001\Cho_N
(q) Click [Current Folder].
(r) Click.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-248
(s) Repeat the procedures described in steps (g) ~ (m).

(t) “Calibration Data” will be stored in “Cho-N” folder in the same way as step (n).
(t) “Calibration Data” will be

stored in “Cho-N” folder.
(u) The operation of “Calibration Data” is completed in “Choroidal (Normal)” mode.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-249
(4) Conversion of “Calibration Data” for the main body.

(a) Execute “CalibrationMakeTool”.
 Only Japanese edition is available for “CalibrationMakeTool” program.
(b) Set “Calibration Data” for “Choroidal (Normal)”, which was created in step (3) to “Edit Text Box”.
i Click “Open” in “Rescaling data (Normal) file name”.
ii Double-click “Rescale_Cho-N” file in “Cho-N” folder.
iii The selected file in “Edit Text Box” will be displayed.
Rescaling data (Normal) file name CalibrationDataMakeTool
(i) Click “Open”.
Edit Text Box
(ii) Double-click “Rescale_Cho-N” file in

“Cho-N” folder.
(iii) Selected file will be displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-250
(c) Set “Calibration Data” for “Vitreous (Reverse)”, which was created in step (3) to “Edit Text Box”.
i Click “Open” in “Rescaling data (Reverse) file name”.
ii Double-click “Rescale_Vit-R” file in “Vit-R” folder Vit-R .
Rescaling data (Reverse) file name
(ii) Double-click “Rescale_Vit-R” file in

“Vit-R” folder.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-251
(d) Enter the serial number of the main unit in "3D OCT-2000 main unit serial number".
(e) Select the folder, in which the “Calibration Data” is stored.
i Click “Open” in “Directory for store”.
ii Select the folder, in which the “Calibration Data” is stored, then click [OK].
3D OCT-2000 main unit serial number.
Directory for store
(ii) Select the folder, in which the calibration data is

stored, then click [OK].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-252
(f) Click [Creation].
(f) Check “Create default”, then

click [Creation].
Create default creation.
[Creation]
(g) The dialog box will be displayed. Click [OK].
(g) Click [OK].
(h) “Calibration File(.CLB)” will be stored in “Inst_SN0001” folder, which was assigned in step (d).
(g) “Calibration File(.CLB)” will be stored.
(i) Rename "3DOCT2000_xxxxxx.CLB" to "xxxxxx_3DOCT - 1 _ FUNDUS.CLB".

 Rename is necessary to execute the next step (5).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-253
(5) Copy “Calibration File” to the main body.

(a) Copy the “Calibration File (*.CLB)”, which was created in step (4) to PC.
(b) Connect the PC and the main body with the LAN cable.
(c) Turn ON the main body.
(d) Launch Send Calibration data.exe.
(e) Click [Reference] in “Fundus Calibration data” frame.
(f) Choose “xxxxxx_3DOCT-1_FUNDUS.CLB” file. (xxxxxx is a serial number)
• The photographing of the anterior segment tomogram (ATTACHMENT FOR ANTERIOR

SEGMENT HA - 2) is an optional accessory and therefore varies depending on the
customer. After purchasing the anterior ocular segment option, photograph the anterior
segment, if there is an abnormality in accuracy, prepare the anterior eye calibration and
carry out the procedure after (g) (section6.2.34). In the same way as item (f), click
[Reference] in the "anterior segment calibration data" column. After creating the anterior
eye calibration, select the "xxxxxx_3DOCT-1_ ANTERIOR.CLB" file(section6.2.10)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-254
(g) Confirm that the CLB file of Fundus is chosen, and confirm that the CLB file of Anterior in case of
Anterior option implementing is chosen, and then click [Send].
(h) Click [Yes] when the following dialog box is displayed.
(i) When normally saved in the main body, the following message is displayed.
(j) Restart the main unit.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-255
(6) Determination of numerical dispersion compensation

(a) Perform the same setting as in step (1).
(b) Click [Search] and confirm that 2nd peak falls within the range of Range; + - [2].
(c) When the vertex of the convex parabola is displayed, click [Searh] at least five times and confirm that
the vertex of the parabola always appears within the display range.
A value of 2nd
is displayed
(d) Enter 2nd value in "Tool mode page 9" - "OCT Image" - "Dispersion Comp 2nd Coef".
Enter 2nd value
(e) After turning off the main unit and restarting it, confirm that each numerical value is memorized in tool
mode.
(f) Confirm that the interference sensitivity falls within the standard (section 6.2.32).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-256
6.2.31 Adjusting the optical path length

Purpose
The rough adjustment of the optical path length correction mechanism and the address position of
the potentiometer at the time of the reference position and double pole movement are stored. The
three numerical values are used to correct the potentiometer. When the optical path length
correction mechanism fluctuates, the fluctuation of the light quantity of the probe system due to
the eccentricity of the corner cube is checked. Confirm that a stable amount of return light can be
obtained regardless of the optical path length.
Necessary tools
Objective lens front holder OCT-1-01
Interference position check tool OCT-1-12
Personal computers (PC) -
LAN cable -
Graph Tool (Ver. 1.0.5 or later) -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-257
Procedure
(1) Preparation for optical path length adjustment
(a) Connect the main unit and PC with LAN cable.
(b) Turn on the main unit.
(c) Start Graph Tool.
(d) Set SLD setting and Graph Tool ( section 6.2.32 step (2)- (b)).
(e) Mount the pre-objective holder and the interference position check tool (hereinafter referred to as the
reference tool) on the main unit.
Interference position check tool
Objective lens front holder

(+10mm) (0mm) (-16mm)
Interference localization tool

(2) Adjustment and record the "-8 mm" position
• Adjustment is always performed in the order of -8 mm →0 mm →+5 mm.
(The interference position checking tool moves in the order of -16 mm → 0 mm → +10
mm(step (e)).)
(a) Set the bar position of the reference tool to "-16mm".
(b) Move the corner cube of the optical path length compensation mechanism and strike against the
mechanical stopper on the galvano mirror side.
Rotate counterclockwise the lead screw with a flat-blade screwdriver etc., and move the corner cube.
(c) Tap CAN SEND TOOL -" Motor Ctl 2/2 "-" Ref Mirror "-" Move "- [Move + 2 mm] and move the
corner cube 2 mm from the abutted position.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-258
(d) Slide the long hole of the optical path length correction mechanism.
Adjust the "Peak Z" of the interferometric signal to 45±10 pixel by sliding the interferometric signal, and
fix the long hole screw (see the figure below).
• If the interference signal is difficult to read, adjust the range of Amplitude (linear).
• Fix the screws of the long hole where the wave form on the Power(log) shows right
downward-sloping from the peak position.
CR2×6S-FW+SW 3BZn
Apply TA lock.
If the interference signal is low,

By rotating the reference tool and
interfering signals
Fix in the raised position.
Right downward-
sloping from the
peak position.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-259
(e) The current sensor position of the optical path length correction mechanism is recorded in the main unit.
i Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” - “Position” - [GET] to note the Sensor values.
ii Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” - “Correction Save” - [-8mm].
(3) Recording the "0 mm" position

(a) Set the bar position of the reference tool to "0 mm".
(b) Using a flat-blade screwdriver, rotate the corner cube and move the interference signal "Peak Z" to 45 ±
10 pixels.
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to rotate.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-260
(c) The current sensor position of the optical path length correction mechanism is recorded in the main unit.
ii Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” - “Correction Save” - [0mm].
(4) Recording the "+5mm" Position

(a) Set the bar position of the reference tool to "+10mm".
(b) Move the "Peak Z" of the interfering signal to 45±10 pixel by using a minus driver or the like.
(c) The current sensor position of the optical path length correction mechanism is recorded in the main unit.
ii Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” - “Correction Save” - [+5mm].
(d) Turn off the main unit.
(5) Confirmation of Records

(b) Start the tool mode.
(c) Refer to the "MOTOR Adjustment 1"-"REFERENCE MIRROR" column on Page 8/9 to confirm that
the three numerical values recorded on the main unit are displayed.
• REFERENCE MIRROR : "0mm" on the CAN SEND TOOL
• REFERENCE MIRROR A : "-5mm" on the CAN SEND TOOL
• REFERENCE MIRROR B : "+8mm" on the CAN SEND TOOL

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-261
(6) Confirmation of changes in the light intensity of the probe system

(a) Preparation
i Start the main unit.
ii Start Graph tool.
iii Set SLD setting and Graph Tool ( section 6.2.32 step (2)-(b)).
iv Mount the front objective holder and the mirror tool to the main unit.
Object holder
Mirror tool
v Switch the ND filter of the mirror tool to a dense ND filter.

vi Adjust the gimbal / optical axis of the mirror tool and maximize the interference signal at Peak Z 40+5/-0.
Thin filter Dense filter Shading
vii Remove the fiber from the spectroscope and attach it to the power meter (Setting λ = 840 nm).
• Shield the surrounding area to prevent unnecessary light.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-262
viii Start the CAN_SEND_TOOL.

ix Moves the optical path length compensator to the saved "REFERENCE MIRROR" position.
Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” -“Move” - [0mm].
(b) Measurement and Recording of Return Light Amount "R" of Reference Part
i Set the ND filter of the mirror tool to the light-blocking position.
ii The power meter measures the light intensity "R" and records it.
(c) Measurement and Recording of the Probe Return Light Amount "O"
i Switch the ND filter of the mirror tool to the not dense side.
ii Measure the light intensity "O" with the power meter and record it.
(d) Measurement and Recording of Probe Return Light Amount "A"

The ND filter of mirror tool remains thinner.
i Moves the optical path length compensator to the stored "REFERENCE MIRROR A" position.
Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” -“Move” - [+5mm].
ii Measure and record the light intensity "A" with the power meter.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-263
(e) Measurement and Recording of Probe Return Light Amount "B"

i Moves the optical path length compensator to the stored "REFERENCE MIRROR B" position.
Tap “Motor Ctl 2/2” - “Ref Mirror” -“Move” - [-8mm].
ii Measure the light intensity "B" by the power meter and recorded.
(f) Confirmation of changes in the light intensity of the probe system

i Calculate the maximum value "M" and the minimum value "m" from the three points "O", "A" and "B".
ii Confirm that "(m-R)/(M-R) ≥ 0.9".
Standard
Item Standard Notes
Probe system light quantity variation (m-R)/(M-R) ≥ 0.9 Calculate the maximum value "M"
and the minimum value "m" from the
three points "O", "A" and "B".
"R" is the return light amount of the
ND filter light shielding position.
(g) Remove the fiber from the power meter and connect it to the main unit.
• Be sure to clean the fiber with a fiber cleaner when connecting the fiber.
(7) If the optical axis and pupil position do not satisfy the specifications at (6), reconfirm the optical axis and
pupil position ( section 6.2.19).
(Even if the pupil position is not out, the variation in light intensity becomes large.)
• If the pupil position is not out, replace and survey each unit of the optical system.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-264
6.2.32 Confirmation and adjustment of interference sensitivity

Purpose
Adjustment/confirmation of the interference sensitivity after adjustment of the intensity at
objective lens or after replacement of the fiber unit (1032005-01 FIBER ASSWMBLY) and signal
intensity reduction of the B-scan image, and adjustment of the polarization controller when the
message "polarization controller initialization error" is displayed will be described.
• This chapter shall be performed after adjusting and checking the position of the line CCD
(section 6.2.28).
Necessary tools
Object front holder OCT-1-01
LAN cable -
Procedure
(1) Preparation of mirror tools
(a) Mount the object front holder and the mirror tool to the main unit.
(b) Adjust the position of the mirror with the micrometer in the X, Y, and Z directions of the mirror tool.
(Fig. 1)
ND filter values
X axis Y axis
Z axis

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-265
(Adjustment of
X-axis)
X axis
Using an X-axis microhead,

Adjust to be parallel
(Adjustment of
Y
Y-axis)
axis
Adjust the Y-axis microhead so

that it is parallel.
(Adjustment of Adjust the plane to be flat by

Z-axis) using a Z-axis microhead.
Z axis

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-266
(2) Confirmation of Interference Sensitivity

(a) Mount the front objective holder and mirror tool.
Mirror tool Object front holder
(b) Checking the Y PEAK

i Connect the main unit and PC with LAN cable and turn on the main unit.
ii Start 3DOCT-1_GraphTool.exe.
iii Enter User Name and Password, and click OK.

iv Enter the Input Light Power values and click OK.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-267
v The following window is displayed. Select [OCT + Fundus] from the pull-down window and click [Scan
Start].
vi Start CAN SEND TOOL.

vii Check the SLD settings.
• "High" SLD on/off
• "Blinking" SLD Pulse
• Set DAC LEVEL and Pulse Width to the correct values.
viii Click [GL-STOP] on the GraphTool to stop the galvano.
ix Click [Vit-R].
x Enter the value of the ND filter (see Figure 1 for the value of the ND filter).
xi Adjust the Z offset, AF, and POLARIZER to the "0 test position".
xii Click [Y AUTO (YD)].
xiii Make sure that the value displayed in "Y PEAK" is "700 digits ± 10%".
Click
ND filter values
(d) Interference at REF positions (40
pixels), 400 pixels, and 600 pixels in the
section shall be within the specification.
Click Y AUTO (YD).

The value displayed in "Y PEAK" shall be "700 digits ± 10%".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-268
(c) Setting the interference signal output

i Switch the ND of the mirror tool to the thinner side.
ii Adjust the mirror of the mirror tool so that it is approximately parallel (Section (1)).
iii Move the mirror tool in the Z direction to adjust the output of graph 1 to be high.
iv Change the ND of the mirror tool to darker.
v Manipulate the microhead of the mirror tool in the X and Y directions to maximize the Graph Tool's
[Sens. Avg] (adjust the mirror tool so that it interferes and produces high power in Graph 2).
(d) Confirmation of Interference-Sensitivity in Individual Depth

i
Operate the moving screw shown below to move the corner cube.
When the PeakZ is 40, 400, or 600 pixels, check that the specifications shown in the table below are met.
Standard
REF position (40 pixels) 94 dB or more Check in Vitreous mode.
100pixel 94 dB or more (The direction in which Peak Z
200pixel 94 dB or more increases as turning the moving
400pixel 88 dB or more screw clockwise.)
600pixel 80 dB or more
ii If it is out of specification, perform the procedure described in (3).
Roughly
parallel
Corner cube
moving screw
ND
switching
Z direction
Graph 1 Graph 2

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-269
(3) Adjustment and Check of Polarization Controller

• The following procedures are performed when the fiber unit is replaced or when the
specifications are not met in Section (2).
(a) Setting the interference signal output

i Perform the same operations as in (2)-(c). (Not required if performed in succession from (2))
ii Adjust the corner cube moving screw so that Peak Z becomes Z = 40 + 5 / - 0 pix (Vitreous Mode).
iii Manipulate the microhead of the mirror tool in the X and Y directions to maximize the Graph Tool's
[Sens. Avg ] (adjust the mirror tool so that it interferes and produces high power in Graph 2).
(b) Confirmation of Interference Sensitivity
i Move the polarization controller to adjust the interference to be high.
Y coupler
Polarization
controller
X coupler
ii As shown below, set GraphTool (blue frame) and adjust the interference sensitivity "Sens Avg" (red
frame) to 95 dB or more.
If it cannot be adjusted, correct the focus adjustment of the Fourier transform lens. (section6.2.28)
Noise;:850~900
Rescaling: Check+[LI]
Disp Comp.; (QM): Check
Scale:[x8]
ND: ND value of mirror tool
Sens Avg

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-270
(c) Preliminary Determination of Numerical Dispersion Compensation Values

i Enter "-10" in the "2nd" field.
ii Click [Search].
iii Enter the measured value of 2nd in the 2nd field, and click Search again.
iv When the vertex of a convex parabola is displayed, click [Searh] at least five times to ensure that the
vertex of the parabola appears within the display area.
Display the
value of 2nd
v Enter 2nd value in "Tool mode page 9" - "OCT Image" - "Dispersion Comp 2nd Coef".
Enter the 2nd value
vi Turn off the main unit and after restarting, confirm that each value is stored in the tool mode.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-271
(d) Position recording of polarization controller

i Perform the same setting as in (3)-(a).
ii Record zero position (initialization position)
• Move the polarization controller and adjust it so that the interference signal becomes maximum at Peak
Z: 40 to 45 pix (Vitreous mode).
• When the polarization controller is moved, the high position of the interference signal appears
periodically. If there is no difference in the magnitude of each peak, set the position away from the
mechanical stopper to 0.
• Tap CAN SEND TOOL-"Motor Ctl 2/2"-"Polarizer"-"Position"-[Get] to display the present sensor
position and make a note.
• Tap Polarizer"-"Correction save-[0] to save the 0 position.
iii Recording position A
• Move the polarization controller until it hits the back mechanical stopper.
• Tap Polarizer"-"Correction save-[A] to save the A position.
iv Recording of position B
• Move the polarization controller until it hits the front mechanical stopper.
• Tap Polarizer"-"Correction save-[B] to save position B.
v Check the 0 position
• The 0 position must be "Y" more than 2 degrees away from the caster.
A[DN] + {2[deg.]×(|A-B|[DN]/190[deg.])} < Y[DN] < B[DN] - {2[deg.]×(|A-B|[DN]/190[deg.]}
• If the 0 position exceeds the range of "Y" mentioned above, repeat "(ii) Record 0 position" to the
position where it becomes maximum within the range of "Y".
Polarization controller
A: Back stopper position
B: Stopper position in front
vi Turn off the power of the main unit and restart. After restarting the main unit, check that the values are
stored in the CAN SEND TOOL.
(e) Return to the step (2) and check the interference sensitivity.
(f) Perform “Rescaling” (section 6.2.30)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-272
6.2.33 Replacement of fiber unit

Purpose
Repair for replacement of fiber unit(1024458-01 FIBER-MODULE) due to SLD module failure,
damage of fiber, “You may not get high-sensitive OCT image. Proceed? [300428～300430]” error
message.
• The end surface of the fiber of FC connector might be dirty. While installing the fiber
system to the main body, clean the end surface with the fiber cleaner.
Necessary tools
Manufacturer: NTT AT
Type: OPTIPOP-R
L-shaped driver -
• After confirmation of the current phenomenon carefully, carry out the following
procedures.
Procedure
(1) Confirm the original PD current.
Confirmation of PD current value ( section 6.2.4)
(2) Confirm the PD current of the spare unit.
Confirmation of PD current value ( section 6.2.4)
(3) Remove the fiber unit.
( section 6.2.4)
(4) Clean the optics. OCT system Optical Cleaning..
Cleaning of the objective lens ( section 11.1). OCT system Optical Cleaning ( section 11.3)
(5) Remove the OCT-PCB
Removing and assembling the OCT PCB ( section 6.1.28)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-273
(6) Installation of OCT_PCB

(a) Install OCT_PCB with 5 screws.
Behind the fiber unit
Use L-shaped driver
(b) Connect the following connectors.

J210 J240 J245 J282
J212 J242 J280 J287
J213 J243 J281 J734
(7) Mounting Spectroscope

(a) Install the Spectrometer removed in the previous step (5). ( section 6.2.28)
(8) how to install the fiber unit
• Take care not to drop the collimator. If dropped , the fiber may be broken.
(a) Pass the SLD module connector through the hole in the fiber unit.
• When passing the connector through the hole of the fiber, be careful of breakage of the
connector.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-274
(b) Attach the fiber unit with four screws.

• If the fiber system is installed forcibly, the positioning of the fiber plate is tight. Therefore
the fiber might be broken.
(c) Attach J921 connector of SLD module.
Pass the connector SLD module

through the hole
(d) Install the fiber patch cord.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-275
(e) Attach the collimator with two hexagonal screws.
(f) Attach the static electricity protection cover with two screws.
(9) Adjustment of OCT_PCB

Adjustment of OCT_PCB( section 6.2.17)
(10) Adjustment of the 0D focus for focusing lens

Adjustment of the 0D focus for focusing lens( section 6.2.21)
(11) Adjustment of pupil position

Pupil position adjustment ( section 6.2.19)
(12) Adjustment of the galvano mirror

Galvano adjustment ( section 6.2.20).
(13) Adjustment of OCT focusing ± 15D focus

Adjustment of OCT focusing ± 15D focus ( section 6.2.22)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-276
(14) Check of optical axis deviation for focusing lens

Check of optical axis deviation for focusing lens( section 6.2.23)
(15) Check of image unstableness for focusing lens

Check of image unstableness for focusing lens( section 6.2.24)
(16) Adjustment of the light quantity.

Adjustment of SLD light quantity ( section 6.2.2)
(17) Adjustment of the Line CCD

Adjustment of Spectrometer and Line CCD ( section 6.2.28)
(18) Adjustment and confirmation of the interference sensitivity

Confirmation and adjustment of interference sensitivity ( section 6.2.32)
(19) Creating of the calibration data (rescaling data)

Rescaling ( section 6.2.30)
(20) Adjusting the optical path length

Adjusting the optical path length( section 6.2.31)
(21) Adjustment and confirmation of the sensor for the intensity at objective lens
Adjustment of the light intensity sensor at objective lens ( section 6.2.3)
(22) Scan length adjustment

Scan length adjustment ( section 6.2.25)
(23) CCD Shift

Correction of CCD Shift ( section 6.2.29)
(24) Creating of the calibration data for the anterior segment

Anterior segment OCT Calibration ( section 6.2.34)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-277
6.2.34 Anterior OCT Calibration

Purpose
To create calibration associated with scan length, thickness, and signal strength failures of
anterior segment photographing images or to create calibration associated with fiber unit
replacement (1024458-01 FIBER-MODULE ( section 6.2.33)).
 To carry out procedures of this chapter, “Anterior segment OCT photographing” should be ON
( (1)-(c)).
Necessary tools
Anterior tool holder OCT-1-23

(including 1.8mm and 3.8mm spacers)
Anterior OCT vertical thickness tool OCT-1-24
Anterior OCT horizontal thickness tool OCT-1-25
Anterior OCT standard value check tool OCT-1-26
Anterior OCT thickness check tool OCT-1-27

(Reference of the attached value of thickness and
refractive at 840 nm)
Scan length check tool OCT-1-28
Anterior segment angle confirmation check tool OCT-1-36
Anterior segment radius of curvature check tool (R8) OCT-1-37

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-278
Anterior segment OCT focus position adjustment tool OCT-1-42
Graph Tool -
Anterior CLB maketool -
Anterior OCT Evaluation -
Special file -
(7D311A6B-6825-4977-ABC3-B4A432F7B0D2)
LAN cable -
• The following procedures are described in this section.

(1)Preparation
(2)Tool inclination adjustment
(3)Optical path length correction
(4)Adjustment of the OCT focusing lens position
(5)Determination of the reference mirror standard position
(6)Anterior segment OCT calibration file
(7)Scan length tool photographing
(8)Photographing of the curvature tool
(9)Acquisition and check of the curve correction value
(10)CCD shift
(11)Check of the longitudinal resolution
(12)Check of the lateral resolution
(13)Thickness check
(14)Photograph the angle check tool
(15)Photographing of the standard position check tool

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-279
Procedure
(1) Preparation
(a) Attachment of the tools
i Attach the Object holder and Anterior segment tool holder to the main unit.
Anterior tool holder Object holder
ii Pinching 1.8mm spacer to the Anterior segment OCT focus position adjustment tool (OCT-1-42), and
attach them to the Anterior segment tool holder.
(b) In the case of an instrument that has not been unlocked on the anterior eye protection, attach the USB
memory that stores the special file to the main unit.
(c) Connect the main unit and the PC with the LAN cable and turn on the main unit.
(d) Scan pattern setting

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-280
i Tap the photographing icon in page 1. Set the scan pattern as shown in the following table.
Photographing icon Scan resolution Scan size OCT focus Super

position imposition
Radial anterior segment 1024 Dia. 6.0mm Cornea No
3D anterior segment 256x256 6.0mm×6.0mm Cornea -
3D anterior segment 256x256 6.0mm×6.0mm Deep pos. -
Line anterior segment 1024H 6.0mm Cornea No
Line anterior segment 1024H 3.0mm Cornea No
Line anterior segment 1024H 3.0mm Deep pos. No
ii Tap [OK] to get out of the setting menu.
(e) GraphTool setting

i Start GraphTool.
ii Select “OCT” and click [Scan Start].
iii Check “Disp Comp.;(QM)”.
iv Enter “-20” in the “2nd” box and press [Enter] of the keyboard.
v Enter “0” in the “left” box of “Pickup line” and press [Enter].
vi Enter “1023” in the “right” box of “Pickup line” and press [Enter].
vii Click [Save BG Spec] and [BG Spec] and check “Removal FPN”.
viii Uncheck “GRAPH” and switch the display to the live OCT image.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-281
ix Click [YAuto(YD)]. Y-axis auto is executed to optimize the output of the line CCD.
(2) Tool inclination adjustment

(a) Tap [+40D] of the “Move” frame of “OCT Focus Motor” in CAN SEND TOOL.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-282
(b) The tool OCT image is displayed in the live OCT image, so you can adjust the inclination of the tool
confirming the stripe pattern of the tool scale.
 If the stripe pattern is difficult to see, refer to step (3) and adjust it to an easily visible setting.
Inclination OK
The stripe pattern of the tool scale is

visible
Inclination NG
Inclination NG
The stripe pattern of the tool scale is not

visible.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-283
(c) After adjustment, tighten the retaining screw of the tool holder to fix the tool.
(3) Optical path length correction

(a) Turn the lead screw of the optical path length with a slotted screwdriver, etc. to change the display
position of the live OCT image.
Lead screw
Turn the lead screw of optical path length

correction to move the position of the live OCT
image to the position shown in the right figure.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-284
(4) Adjustment of the OCT focusing lens position

Perform the following operation in the “OCT Focus Motor” frame of CAN SEND TOOL.
(a) Tap [Get] in the “Position” frame to display the sensor value of the current OCT focusing lens in
“Sensor”.
(b) Enter the figure of the sensor value of the current focusing lens plus “100” in “Sensor” of the “Move”
frame and tap [Move].
(c) Tap [Get] in the “Position” frame to display the sensor value of the current OCT focusing lens in
“Sensor”.
(d) Adjust the focus as follows limiting the range between “40D position” and “40D position + 100DN”
based on the position of (b).
i Enter the value of 40D in the check sheet.
ii Change the value of sensor of the “Move” frame at intervals of 20DN and press [Move] to move the
OCT focusing lens.
iii Tap [Get] in “Position” to confirm the sensor value of the moved current focusing lens.
• In the focus point, the contrast of the stripe pattern of the live OCT image is high and the artifact is
intense.
• Record the value at the focus point.
*As getting away from the focus point, the artifact becomes pale and gradually disappears.
In addition, the contrast of the striper pattern of the live OCT image becomes lower.
Artifact

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-285
(e) Writing of the focus point

i Tap [Anterior] of the “Correction save” frame and record the sensor value of the focusing lens.
(f) Storage of the live OCT image immediately after focus adjustment
i Click [SaveOCT] in Graph Tool.
ii The “OCTImage” folder is created in the same folder as that of Graph Tool.exe. In that folder, the serial
number folder of the main unit and the raw file of the OCT image are stored.
(The file name is “OCTImageDate.Time”.)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-286
(5) Determination of the reference mirror standard position

Determine the Cornea reference mirror standard position and Deep reference mirror standard
position.
(a) CAN SEND TOOL and the positions of the OCT focusing lens shall be kept as it is after focus
adjustment.
(b) Start Graph Tool.
i Check “GRAPH” and show the display graphically.
ii Enter “512” in the “left” box of “Pickup line” and press [Enter].
iii Enter “512” in the “right” box of “Pickup line” and press [Enter].
iv Uncheck “Removal FPN”.
v Click [GL-STOP].
• Do not stare into the objective lens with eye.
vi Press [x8] of “Scale”.

vii Keep “Disp Comp.;(QM)” checked.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-287
(c) Determination of the standard position of the Cornea mode

i Attach the standard position check tool to the anterior tool holder.
ii Tap the [Motor Ctl 2/2] tab in Can Send Tool.

iii Tap [0mm] of the “Move” frame of the “Ref Mirror” frame and move optical path length correction to
the standard position.
iv Ensure that the OCT signal is displayed in Graph Tool.

• Set Y - MAX of Power (log); to "120" and change the value of Y - MAX if the signal is
difficult to see.
v Press [Vit-R] to switch to the Cornea mode.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-288
vi Rotate the optical path length correction and move it within peak Z=40+0/+5pix. confirming the OCT
signal and peakZ of Graph Tool.
• Optical path length correction shall be rotated clockwise.
If peakZ exceeds the adjustment range, rotate the lead screw counterclockwise, take the
return OCT signal, rotate optical path length correction clockwise again, and move it
within peakZ=40+0/+5pix. (see the next page)
Lead screw
• When the peak of the OCT signal is low, rotate the standard position confirmation tool and
fix it to a position with high OCT signal.
Rotate the brass part to

raise the OCT signal

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-289
*Rotate optical path length correction clockwise and repeat the process shown in the following figure if the
OCT signal exceeds peakZ=45.
Rotate counterclockwise
to return the OCT signal
Clockwise
Return of the OCT signal

Rotate clockwise again

Over adjustment
range
Within
PeakZ=40+0/+5pix,

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-290
vii Keep optical path length correction fixed with Peak Z=40+0/+5pix. in the “Ref Mirror” frame of CAN
SEND TOOL, press [Get] of the “Position” frame, and enter the figure of “Sensor” as the Cornea
reference mirror sensor value in the check sheet.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-291
(d) Determination of the numerical dispersion compensation coefficient

i Tap [Search] with optical path length correction keeping PeakZ=40+0/+5pix with GraphTool. "Search of
Dispersion Compensation" is displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-292
ii Enter the figure of **** of “2nd (****)” displayed immediately below the "Search of Dispersion
Compensation" in the “2nd” box and press [Enter].
iii Change “5” to “2” in the “Range;+-“ box and press [Enter].
iv Click [Search].
v Click [Search] twice. Confirm that the vertex of the red line (mount-shaped parabola) of “Search of
Dispersion Compensation” is displayed within the display range of the graph together with the two
results.
vi The value displayed in “2nd” in the following figure is the numerical dispersion compensation coefficient.
Record the value because it is used in (8).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-293
(e) Determine the standard position of the Deep pos. mode

i Start Graph Tool.
ii Press [Cho-N] and switch to the Deep pos. mode.
iii Reverse the sign [+/-] in the "2nd" column and press [Enter].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-294
(f) Attach 3.8mm spacer to standard position check tool(OCT-1-26) and attach them to the tool holder for
anterior segment”. Fix the unit by tightening the retaining screw of the tool holder.
(g) Tap [0mm] of the “Move” frame of the “Ref Mirror” frame of CAN SEND TOOL and move optical
path length correction to the standard position.
(h) Confirm that the position of the OCT signal of Graph Tool appears near the position shown in the
following figure.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-295
(i) Rotate optical path length correction and move it within peakZ=40+0/+5pix. confirming the OCT signal
and peakZ of the tool software.
• If it is immediately after Cornea mode adjustment, rotate counterclockwise, take an OCT
signal, and move the OCT signal counterclockwise to the extent that it sufficiently exceeds
peakZ >= 200pix.
Next, rotate optical path length correction and move it within peakZ=40+0/+5pix.
If it is not within peakZ=40pix. +0/+5pix., rotate optical path length correction
counterclockwise again, move it to peakZ >= 200pix., and then move it clockwise to
within peakZ=40+0/+5pix.
Lead screw
Rotate optical path length correction Rotate optical path length correction
counterclockwise, return the OCT clockwise from peakZ>=200pix., move
signal, and move it to peakZ>=200pix. the OCT signal to peakZ=40+0/+5pix.
and fix it.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-296
(j) Keep optical path length correction fixed with Peak Z=40+0/+5pix. press [Get] of the “Position” frame
in the “Ref Mirror” frame of CAN SEND TOOL and note the figure of “Sensor” as the Deep reference
mirror sensor value in the check sheet.
(k) Close Graph tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-297
(6) Anterior segment OCT calibration file

(a) Creation of the initial calibration file
Create a calibration file which records the address values of the standard position and the numerical
dispersion compensation coefficient.
Prepare a temporary calibration file and rewrite it with the determination of software to create a file
unique to the device.
i Start Anterior Calibration Make Tool For Maestro.
ii Select “OCT-1” and click [OK].
iii Enter the following four items.

“Serial”: Main unit serial number
“Cornea reference”: Enter the address of the recorded reference mirror
“Deep reference”: Enter the address value of the recorded reference mirror
“DC 2”: Value of the secondary coefficient of numerical dispersion compensation

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-298
iv Click [Create a calibration file] to create a calibration file.

Enter “1” in “File name” and click [Save]. “File type” is “CLB”.
v When the dialog of "Calibration has been created" is displayed click [OK].
The anterior segment software automatically saves a file with the name of the entered main unit serial
number (******). It is "3DOCT-1_ANTERIOR_*******.CLB."
 If the same serial number exists in the storage location, it is automatically overwritten.
 If the storage location is not specified, the file is saved in the folder of AnteriorCalibrationMakeTool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-299
(b) Transmission of the main unit of the calibration file

*If the manufacturing serial of the main unit does not match the serial number of the calibration file, the
main unit does not recognize the calibration file, which you should note.
i Start “3DOCT-1_SendCalibrationData.exe”.
ii Click [Reference...] in the "Anterior calibration data" frame.
iii The file selection screen will open. Select the CLB file created in (a) and click [Open].
iv Click [Send].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-300
v The dialog shown below is displayed. Click [Yes].
vi The dialog shown below is displayed. Click [OK].
vii Restart the main unit. Hereinafter be sure to restart the main unit after sending a calibration file to the
main unit.
• In the case of an instrument that has not been unlocked on the anterior eye protection,
attach the USB memory that stores the special file to the main unit

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-301
(7) Scan length tool photographing
• All the shooting of step (7) to (15) should be done with "right eye".
(a) Start IMAGEnet6.

(b) Attach the anterior segment OCT scan length check tool(OCT-1-28) to the anterior tool holder. Select
[3D anterior segment].
Tap "OK" when "Please attach the attachment for photographing the anterior segment" is displayed.
Item Settings
Anterior segment and fundus anterior segment
Scan pattern 3D
Scan resolution 256 x 256
Scan length 6.0mm x 6.0mm
Cornea/Deep position Cornea
Super imposition -
Right eye/Left eye Right eye
(c) Tap [capture START] of the main unit to display the live OCT image.
(d) Adjust the optical path length correction mechanism manually and move the position of the live OCT
image of the main unit.
(e) Rotate the brass part of the tool to make the scale of the live OCT image even.
Turn the lead screw of

optical path length correction
counterclockwise with a
slotted screwdriver, etc.
Rotate the brass part of the tool

Make sure that the to make the scale even
"number" on the
scale position is
not to be sideways
or upside down.
Move optical path length correction to move

the position of the live OCT image to the
position shown in the right figure.
(f) Turn the scan length tool to reduce the inclination of the tool against the OCT image.
(g) Tap [capture START] of the main unit to start photographing.
The fds file will be saved.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-302
(h) Determination of the scan length

i Start Anterior CLB make tool and confirm that the "Anterior Segment " tab is displayed.
ii Click [Load the calibration file] to load the calibration file sent to the main unit before scan length tool
photographing.
iii Click [File] - [Open] at the upper left of the screen and open the fds file of the photographed scan length
tool.
iv Enter the value on the back of the scan length tool in X and Y of "Tool parameter."
v Click [Get Scan Length].
Right-click on the projection image and

click "Overall display" and then the
projection image will be enlarged.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-303
(i) The scale of the projection image is loaded and "十" is displayed on a large scale (0.5mm interval) as
shown in the lower left figure and then dialogs are displayed in the order shown in the lower right
figure. Click [Yes] and then [OK].
(j) "Scan length X" and "Scan length Y" are rewritten so confirm whether the standard value is within
6mm±5%.
(k) If the scan length is within the standard

i Enter the galvano amplitude and fds file name of X and Y in the check sheet.
ii Keep AnteriorCLBmaketool open and proceed to the next process.
(l) If the scan length is out of the standard (If the dialog shown in the following figure is displayed)
i The dialog of the following figure is displayed to optimize the scan length.
ii Click [Yes] and change the galvano amplitude.
iii Click [Create a calibration file] to recreate a calibration file.
iv Perform the procedures again from “(6) – (b)Transmission of the main unit of the calibration file”.
v Repeat the procedure until the standard is met.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-304
(8) Photographing of the curvature tool

(a) Attachment of the curvature tool and photographing setting
i Attach the anterior segment OCT R8 model eye (OCT-1-37)to the tool holder for the anterior segment.
ii Select [Radial anterior segment].
Item Settings
Anterior segment and fundus Anterior segment
Scan pattern Radial
Scan resolution 1024
Scan length Dia 6.0mm
Super imposition No
(b) Photographing of the anterior segment OCT R8 model eye.

i Tap [capture START].
ii Tap [Manual mode].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-305
iii Turn the lead screw of the corner cube and move the interference image to the top.
iv Tap [Capture START].
Use a flathead screwdriver or

something like that to turn
the lead screw for optical
path length correction
v The fds file will be saved.
(9) Acquisition and check of the curve correction value

(a) Loading of the image of the Cornea curvature tool and calculation of the correction coefficient
i Return to AnteriorCLBmaketool and Click [File] - [Open] at the upper left of the screen.
ii Load the fds file of the photographed R8 model eye.
iii Enter the true value shown in the anterior segment OCT R8 model eye in the "Curvature of model."
iv Click [Get Curvature Coel].
v When the dialog is displayed click [OK].
(b) Check of the Cornea curve correction value

i Click [Check Calibration Data].
ii Check that all of the 12 meridians of radial scan are within ±5% from the true value.
iii When the dialog is displayed click [OK] on the condition that the standard value is met.
The B-Scan image with curve corrected is displayed.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-306
B-Scan image with curve

corrected
Vertical axis: Change rate from the true value,

Unit: [%]
Horizontal axis: Radial 12 meridians,
Unit: meridian count
1st from the left end: X scan
7th from the left end: Y scan
(c) If the curve correction value is acquired correctly, the orange line overrides the upper layer of the image
of the model line as shown in the following figure.
Check all 12 of the meridians 1 to 12 that the curve correction value is acquired correctly by changing
the Index of the "ScanData" frame. (The tomogram of the model eye shall be below the orange
meridian. In addition, the 12 tomograms of R are the same.)
(d) Check that the error is 5% or less and fill in the check sheet. Also, enter the fds file name in each check
sheet.
The result should meets the following formula.
(Lowest value in the 12 meridians) / (true value of R8 model eye) × 100 = 100±5%
(e) Creation of a calibration file and its transmission to the main unit
i Press [Create a calibration file] to save a calibration file.
ii Send the calibration file to the main unit referring to “(6)-(b)Transmission of the main unit of the
calibration file”.
iii Restart the main unit.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-307
(10) CCD shift

(a) Start CCDShift2.
*Only at the time of first startup, start "RegistImageAlignment.bat" saved in the same folder as that of
CCDshift2.exe and register DLL.
(b) Click [Anterior].
(c) Click [adjusting criterion].
(d) Attach the anterior segment OCT scan length tool(OCT-1-28) to the anterior tool holder.
(e) Select [3D Anterior segment.] of the photographing pattern in the main unit.
(f) Tap "OK" when "Please attach the attachment for photographing the anterior segment" is displayed.
Item Settings
Scan pattern 3D
Scan length 6.0mm x 6.0mm
Super imposition -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-308
(g) Scan length tool inclination adjustment

i Turn the tool for adjustment checking the main unit monitor.
Turn the anterior segment OCT scan length tool.

Reduce the inclination checking the monitor.
ii Click [Photographing] of CCDshift2.
(h) The projection image is displayed in CCDShift2.

Check the inclination of the projection image against the green frame.
Repeat (f) until the inclination of tool becomes zero (see the following figure).
Check that "green frame" matches "horizontal

line of the scale of the tool."
If they do not match, turn the tool and
perform photographing again.
The display position of the green frame can
be moved with the mouse.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-309
(i) Click [OK].
(j) Click [size positioning].
(k) Select "Color" in the "Camera" frame of CCDshift2 and click [Photographing].
The work shall be done in "Color" and "IR." The order is not specified.
• Irradiate the anterior segment OCT scan length tool with the LED light and take a picture.
If not irradiated, the anterior segment OCT scan length tool may not be visible.
Select either "Color" or

"IR" and click
[Capture].
(l) Adjustment of the position and size

*The following shows an example of photographing selecting Color.
• You can adjust the position by clicking and dragging the projection image using the mouse.
• You can adjust the size by clicking and dragging around the projection image using the mouse.
i If the size is difficult to adjust, you can make the project image transparent by right-clicking on the
projection image. There are several transmission stages and adjustment is done at any transmission rate.
ii The "allowable misalignment amount" is "up to the line width of one scale of the scan length tool."
Make adjustment by visual check.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-310
(m) Adjust IR and the projection image.

i Select "IR camera" in (g) and click [capture].
ii Adjust the position and size as that of (h).
(n) Click [OK] after adjusting both color and IR.
(o) Click [Send adjust data]. The correction value of CCD shift2 is sent to the main unit.
(p) After "All processing has ended" is displayed, click [OK].
(q) Restart the main unit.
(r) Start IMAGEnet6.
(s) Select [3D anterior segment] in the main unit.
(t) Tap "OK" when "Please attach the attachment for photographing the anterior segment" is displayed.
Item Settings
Anterior segment and Anterior
fundus segment
Scan pattern 3D
Scan length 6mm
Super imposition -
(u) Photography the color image and IR image. Confirm that the display of each
image of "IR" and "projection", "color" and "projection" on the display of
IMAGEnet 6 are within "Allowable deviation amount (the line width of the Scan
length of tool scale) "
• You can set transparency by clicking [Overlay] on the shooting screen of IMAGEnet 6.
• It is possible to enlarge / reduce with mouse scroll.
Color fundus photography ON / OFF button
Tap [Advance] on the shooting screen and switch between

color shooting and IR shooting with [ON] / [OFF] on "Color
fundus photography ON / OFF button".
Turn the lead screw of the corner cube and move
the interference image to the top to shoot.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-311
(v) Fill in the check sheet.

(w) Readjust CCD shift2 only when the allowable misalignment amount is exceeded.
(11) Check of the longitudinal resolution

Check that the longitudinal resolution is within the standard.
(a) Attach the anterior segment OCT longitudinal resolution check tool(OCT-1-24) to the anterior tool
holder.
(b) Start IMAGEnet6.
(c) Select [Line Anterior segment] of the photographing pattern in the main unit.
Item Settings
Scan pattern Line
Scan resolution 1024H
Scan length 6mm
Super imposition No
(d) Photographing and check of the longitudinal resolution tool

i Photograph the longitudinal resolution tool. The fds file will be saved.
ii Click [Analysis] of IMAGEnet6.
iii Enlarge the OCT image, check that the line of the upper layer is displayed being separated into three
layers (two layers and one thin black layer between them), and fill in the check sheet.
If it is difficult to judge, select "Right click → Color → Execute" and adjust the color mode below to
change the visibility of longitudinal resolution. of the OCT image

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-312
(12) Check of the lateral resolution

Check whether the lateral resolution is within the standard.
(a) Insert 3.8mm spacer between the lateral resolution check tool(OCT-1-25) (hereinafter called lateral
resolution tool) and the "tool holder for the anterior segment.
Fix the retaining screw of the tool holder for the anterior segment.

(c) Select [Line anterior segment] in the main unit.
Item Settings
fundus segment
Scan pattern Line
Scan length 3mm
Super imposition No

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-313
(d) Photographing of the tool and check of the lateral resolution

i Tap [Capture START] to display the live display screen of the main unit monitor.
ii Adjust the display depth of the live OCT image. Adjust the optical path length correction mechanism
manually and move the live OCT image to a shallow position.
Turn the lead screw of optical path length

correction counterclockwise with a flat-
head screwdriver, etc.
iii When you tap the IR observation screen of the main unit monitor, the arrows are displayed in 4
directions.
If the arrow is not displayed, enter the tool mode once, tap [OK] to exit the menu, then select the
shooting icon again.
iv Tap only the upward and downward arrows displayed to move the scan position.
v Move the scan position and photograph in a position where the artifact is slightly visible (See the
following figure).
• Do not move to any positions where the artifact is clearly visible.

• The position of "a position where artifacts are slightly visible" is a position where the
vertical direction of the arrow is searched for "a position where the artifact starts to appear
slightly" and the vertical direction of the arrow is tapped once in the direction which the
artifact becomes stronger
Strong reflection part
OCT scan position Artifact

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-314
vi In IMAGEnet6, enlarge the photographed OCT image and check that there is "jagged" display (See the
following figure).
*In the artifact, reflection is so strong that visibility is bad.
Check in a part without artifact and fill in the check sheet.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-315
(13) Thickness check

Check whether the thickness can be displayed within the standard.
(a) Attach the anterior segment OCT thickness check tool(OCT-1-27) to the anterior tool holder.
Item Settings
Scan pattern Line
Scan length 6mm
Super imposition No
(d) Photographing of the tool and thickness check

i Photograph the anterior segment OCT thickness check tool.
The fds file is saved.
ii Click [Viewer] of IMAGEnet6.
iii Click [Measurement], select "Line" in the measurement window, and measure the thickness of the
central part Ca [um].
Measure
Measure window
When you hold down [Ctrl] and

write a line with left click, it
becomes a vertical line
iv Do the following calculation.

Ca *(1.38/ Ti) = Cf [um]
Cf / Tf = R
Ca: Caliper value

Cf: Caliper value converted to the physical length
Ti: Refractive index of the thickness confirmation tool (described in the tool)
Tf: True value of the physical length of the thickness check tool (described in the tool)
R: Ratio between Cf and Tf
v Check that they meet the standard and fill in the check sheet.
Standard value: 0.97≤R≤1.03

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-316
(14) Photograph the angle check tool

Check that the angle can be displayed within the standard.
(a) Install 1.8mm spacer between the anterior segment OCT angle check tool(OCT-1-36) and the tool
holder for the anterior segment..
Fix the retaining screw of the tool holder for the anterior segment.

Item Settings
fundus segment
Scan pattern Line
Scan length 3mm
Cornea/Deep position Deep
Super imposition No

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-317
(d) Positioning and photographing of the tool

i Horizontal scan (X direction)
As shown in the lower left figure, turn the tool so that the edge of the prism becomes normal to the scan
direction and check that the edge of the triangle prism is displayed in the screen.
If the edge is out of the screen, check that it is displayed by turning the tool 180 degrees.
IR
Scan
direction
Edge of the prism
Live OCT
image
Edge of the prism

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-318
(e) Alignment
i Tap the "IR observation screen" of the main unit monitor to display [Rotation button].
ii Tap [Rotation button] to turn the scan direction 90 degrees to make it vertical.
iii Turn the tool so that the two lines of the live OCT image of the tool beCornealmost parallel.
Rotation
button
Turn the tool to make it

parallel
iv Tap [Rotation button] to turn the scan direction 90 degrees to make it horizontal.
v Tap [Capture START] to start photographing.
vi Vertical scan (Y direction)

Photograph for vertical scan as with horizontal scan. Refer to the photographing procedure of horizontal
scan.
vii Turn the scan direction 90 degrees to get it upright.
viii Turn the tool so that the edge of the prism becomes normal to the scan direction and check that the edge
of the triangle prism is displayed in the screen.
If the edge is out of the screen, check that it is displayed by turning the tool 180 degrees.
Edge of the prism
ix Make the scan direction horizontal.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-319
x Turn the tool so that the two lines of the live OCT image of the tool beCornealmost parallel.
Turn the tool to make it

parallel
xi Turn the scan direction 90 degrees to get it upright.

xii Tap [Capture START] to start photographing.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-320
(f) Check of the angle

Do it for each of horizontal and vertical scan.
i Start AnteriorOctEvaluation.
ii Click [FDS/FDA] to load the fds file of horizontal (or vertical) scan of the photographed angle check
tool.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-321
iii Check that "deep" is selected in "Correction Type."

iv Select "Angle" in "Caliper Mode."
v Measure the angle of the lower left tool OCT image in the following figure.
vi See the following figure for the order of left click of the mouse when pulling the caliper. Left-click the
screen in the order of (1) -> (2) -> (3) or (3) -> (2) -> (1) in the following figure.
(g) Check of the standard value.
16.28 =< (Caliper value) =< 16.93
(h) Check that the standard is met and fill in the check sheet.
Also, enter the fds file name of each of X and Y in each check sheet.
• After checking X or Y, exit ”AnteriorOctEvaluation” once and check Y or X again.
(1)
(2)
(3)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-322
(15) Photographing of the standard position check tool

Check that the standard position is within the tolerance.
(a) Attach the standard position check tool(OCT-1-26) to the anterior tool holder.
(c) Select [Radial Anterior segment] in the main unit.
Item Settings
fundus segment
Scan pattern Radial
Scan resolution 1024
Scan length Dia. 6mm
Super imposition No

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-323
(d) Photographing of the tool and thickness check

i Photograph the standard position tool. The fds file will be saved.
ii Click [Viewer] of IMAGEnet6.
iii Enlarge the OCT image and measure from the upper part of the photographing screen to the surface of
the standard position tool using the caliper function.
iv Check that the measurement result is 52+/-73µm in tissue.
v Enter the value of the standard measure in the check sheet.
Measure this
distance
Make it monochrome if it
is difficult to see

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
6-324
6.2.35 Replacing the OCT IMG Board

Purpose
Due to an error of "CIBT board error (Error Code: xxx)", when each function is malfunctioning,
if it can not be recovered even after various adjustments, It describes a series of procedures for
OCT IMG Board exchange.
Necessary tools: None
Procedure
(1) Replacing the OCT IMG Board
(a) Check the DIP SW setting. (Chapter 2)
(b) Exchange the OCT IMG Board(section 6.1)
(c) Update the software(Chapter 5)
• Since the OCT IMG Board does not store the correction value, it is not necessary to
transfer the correction value from the GPU board.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-1
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
Decide a classification based on the error message and phenomenon. Refer to below items for details.
7.1 You may not get high-sensitive OCT image.Proceed？[xxxxxx]

• Refer to page 6-1 for Disassembly and Adjustment Procedures
Error Code[300428] Check points, Replacement

Broken Y axis
or [300429] ・Y axis movement
mechanism
with Spectrometer ( section 6.2.28)
Broken Attenuator Replacement

Line CCD Signal is low mechanism ・Fiber unit ( section 6.2.33)
or high
Broken OCT_ PCB Check points, Replacement

（1021856-01）・OCT_PCB
( section 6.2.17)
Broken Line CCD Camera Check points

（1010621-01 L_CCD_CAM_E2V）・Graph tool( section 6.2.28)
Replacement
( section 6.1,6.2.28)
Broken SLD module Check points

・Obj lens power ( section 6.2.2)
・PD current ( section 6.2.4)
Replacement
・Fiber unit
( section 6.2.33)
Error Code[300430] Broken Y axis mechanism Check points, Replacement

with Spectrometer ・Y axis movement
( section 6.2.28)
Line CCD Signal is no Peak
（1010621-01 L_CCD_CAM_E2V）・Graph tool( section 6.2.28)
Replacement
( section 6.1,6.2.28)
Broken SLD module Check points

・Obj lens power ( section 6.2.2)
Replacement
・Fiber unit
( section 6.2.33)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-2
Error Code Broken objective sensor Check points

[300407] or Dirt of sensor ・Obj lens Cleaning
( section 11.1）
or ・Obj sensor ( section 6.2.3)
Replacement
SLD light volume
exceeds upper limit ・Obj sensor ( section 6.1)
Please turn the Broken SLD module
power switch OFF. Check points
Replacement
・Fiber unit
Objective sensor value is ( section 6.2.33)
low （Lower limit)
or
high （Upper limit）

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-3
7.2 SLD light source error(xx) Please turn the power switch OFF.
Error Code Broken SLD module Check points

[110104] ・PD current ( section 6.2.4)
Replacement
・Fiber unit ( section 6.2.33)
The SLD temperature is
abnormal.
Broken OCT-PCB Check points, Replacement

（1021856-01）・OCT-PCB
( section 6.2.17）
Error Code Broken SLD module Check points

[100112] ・PD current ( section 6.2.4)
[100116] Replacement
The SLD light intensity is

abnormal.
Broken OCT-PCB Check points, Replacement

（1021856-01）・OCT-PCB
( section 6.2.17)
Check points
Noise on ・PD current ( section 6.2.4)
Broken SLD module
B-scan image Replacement
Broken OCT IMG Board Replacement

(CIBT4) ・OCT IMG Board
( section 6.1,6.2.35)

（1010621-01 L_CCD_CAM_E2V）・Obj lens Cleaning
( section 11.1)
・Spectrometer ( section 6.2.28)
Replacement
・Line CCD unit ( section 6.1)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-4
7.3 Trouble in the parts related with B-scan image

Vertical or Horizontal Check points
Broken SLD module
noise on B-scan
・Cleaning ( section 11.3)
Replacement

（1010621-01 L_CCD_CAM_E2V）・Cleaning ( section 11.3)
Replacement
・Line CCD ( section 6.1)
Stripe issue on B-scan Check points

Broken SLD module
Replacement

(1010621-01 L_CCD_CAM_E2V)
Replacement
・Line CCD ( section 6.1)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-5
7.4 Trouble in the parts related with Control Panel(LCD Touch panel)
Nothing is displayed. Check for connection of Check points

(Main unit can be LCD_VIDEO_CABLE CN301: POWER/USB
turned on) (Touch Panel) system
CN101:Control system
CN4561:USB(Touch Panel)
CN5220:LCD power / control
LCD failure Replacement ( section 6.1)
GPU_BOARD failure Replacement ( section 6.1,6.2.18)

(1022298-01)
Dot on LCD remains LCD failure Replacement ( section 6.1)

ON
Display is corrupted Check for connection of Check points

(not synchronized) LCD_VIDEO_CABLE CN101:Control system
Line noise is displayed Check for connection of Check points

LCD_VIDEO_CABLE CN101:Control system
GPU_BOARD failure Replacement

(1022298-01) ( section 6.1,6.2.18)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-6
Check points
Touch panel doesn’t
Check for connection of CN301:POWER/USB
work
LCD_VIDEO_CABLE (Touch Panel)
CN4561:USB (Touch Panel)
GPU-BOARD failure Replacement ( section 6.2.18)

(1022298-01)
Touch point is
incorrect.
Display is upside-down. TRC_M2-PCB UNIT failure Replacement

( section 6.1,6.2.16)
LCD_TURN_SENSOR Replacement ( section 6.1)

failure

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-7
7.5 Trouble in the parts related with Camera

Check points
Anterior segment ・Camera side / PCB side 1-6pin:
Check for connection of
observation image is POWER +12[V]
COLOR_CAM_P_CBL
not displayed.
TRC_M2-PCB UNIT failure Replacement ( section 6.1)
Check for connection of Check points

CAM_USB3_CABLE ・Connect USB Cable firmly
GPU_BOARD failure Replacement

(1022298-01) ( section 6.1,6.2.18)
COLOR_CAMERA_USB3 Replacement ( section 6.1)

(BASLER) failure
Check points
Stereo camera image is
Check ANT_OBS_CBL ・Camera side
not displayed.
CN2:Video signal
CN1: Power 1-2pin +3.3[V]
・GPU side: J12-for Master
or J13-for Slave
“Camera is not ・LCD_FLIP_SIG:
connected” error is Connect GPU_IO_CABLE1
displayed. firmly
ANT_OBS_CAMERA
(Master side) failure Replacement ( section 6.1)
At right looking from patient side

ANT_CAM_SYNCCBL ・Connect master and Slave
camera firmly
ANT_OBS_CAMERA
(Slave side) failure Replacement ( section 6.1)
At left looking from patient side
Check Check points
ANT_OBS_CBL2 ・Camera side
CN2:Video signal
CN1: Power 1-2pin +3.3[V]
・GPU side: J12-for Master
J13-for Slave
GPU-BOARD failure Replacement

(1022298-01) ( section 6.1,6.2.9)
Hot Pixel on fundus
image COLOR_CAMERA _USB3 Replacement
(BASLER) failure ( section 6.1,6.2.8)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-8
7.6 Troubles in the parts related with Galvano mirror
Galvano Error. Check for connection of Check points

Please turn the power Galvano driver cable ・Galvano mirror – driver PCB
switch OFF. ( section 6.1,6.2.20)

GALV_CTRL_CABLE(102 ・driver PCB – OCT PCB
4659) or Galvano Power ( section 6.1,6.2.20)
cable （1024557-01）
Broken Galvano mirror Check points, Replacement

or Driver PCB ・Galvano mirror movement
（47010 68500） ( section 6.2.20)
Scan line swing issue Shift of Galvano mirror Check points

or position ・Galvano mirror movement
Scan length is not
( section 6.2.20)
normal
Broken Galvano mirror or Check points, Replacement

Driver PCB ・Galvano mirror movement
（47010 68500） ( section 6.2.20)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-9
7.7 Troubles in the parts related with Fundus image
Center ghost on image Check of the objective Check points

lens position Cleaning ( section 11.1)
Carry out Black spot re- Check points

adjustment ・Black spot adjustment
( section 6.2.15)
Dust on the image Clean optics Check points

(objective lens) ・Cleaning ( section 11.1)
Replacement
Replace ELBOW UNIT
・ELBOW UNIT
（1019967-01）
( section 6.1,6.2.15)
White mist, shadow, Check points

flare on the image Clean optics
(objective lens) ・Cleaning ( section 11.1)
Replace ELBOW UNIT Replacement

（1019967-01）・ELBOW UNIT
( section 6.1,6.2.15)
Adjust mask position Check points

for illuminator ( section 6.2.27)
Check of the objective

Check points
lens position ( section 11.1)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-10
7.8 Troubles in the parts related with boot up
Black Screen on LCD Broken GPU-BOARD Replacement

monitor （1022298-01）・GPU Board( section 6.1,6.2.18)
or
Replacement
Broken Micro SD card
・Micro SD card
Repeat Reboot up
or ( section 6.1,6.2.18)
Freeze on TOPCON
LOGO
No turn on Fuse blown Replacement

・( Instruction Manual)
Broken Power Check points, Replacement

Supply PCB ・( section 2.3.3,6.1)
7.9 Troubles in the parts related with polarization controller
Polarizer motor polarization controller Check points

initialization error failure ・polarization controller adjustment
( section 6.2.32)
polarization controller Broken Check points

failure
DC_MOTOR_UNIT ・Check polarization controller motor
・polarization controller adjustment
( section 6.2.32)
Replacement
・Fiber unit( section 6.1,6.2.33)
Broken Check points

SENSOR_UNIT ・polarization controller adjustment
( section 6.2.32)
Replacement
・Fiber unit( section 6.1,6.2.33)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-11
7.10 Xe light source error（xx）. Please turn the power switch OFF.
Error Code（03） Broken XE FLASH UNIT M2 Check points, Replacement

（1024716-01） XE FLASH UNIT M2
( section 6.1,6.2.5)
Charge error time-out
7.11 Others
Failed in auto focus. TRC focus position failure Check points

Please push ( section 6.2.11)
[Optimize] button Replacement
and execute auto ( section 6.1)
focus again,
or manually adjust
focus.
Split analysis frame Check points, Replacement

failure ( section 6.2.12,6.2.13,6.2.14)
Decline of the chinrest Replacement ( section 6.1)

unit
Lamp house cover is off. Check for Lamp Check points( section 6.1)
Please turn the power House cover
switch OFF and close （Inter Lock error）
the cover.
Detected blink while Check for the Blink Check points

capturing fundus image. detection value Blink Detection ( section 6.2.7)
Please try again.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
7-12

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-1
8. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Error message/Message ID Contents
[Galvano unit error]: The operation of the Galvano mirror may
be abnormal.
● Defective GALVANO_UNIT (4701068500)
[SLD light intensity error]: The SLD light intensity exceeds

the upper limit.
● Defective SLD module (10124720-01)
● Galvano mirror swing failure
● Malposition of the galvano mirror
[OCT-PCB (1021856-01) error]

● Defective OCT-PCB
[Abnormal upper limit of OCT-PCB (1021856-01)

temperature]
[Light source error (PD current error) in SLD module]

● Deterioration and damage of SLD light source
[Error in Peltier element in SLD module]


R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-2
[EEPROM error of OCT-PCB (1021856-01)]

[OCT-PCB (1021856-01) or SLD light source error]

[Circuit error of OCT-PCB (1021856-01)]

[Xenon overcharge]
(When the difference between the charge set value and the
overcharge set value is +10V or more.)
● XE_FLASH_UNIT_M2(1024716-01)
[SLD Light Source Error]: The SLD light intensity exceeds

the lower limit.
[Failure of internal communication]

● Defective GPU_BOARD(1022298-01)
[Bad initialization]
● OCT_IMG-BOARD (4701167000) failure
[Fan operation error]

● Poor CPU_FAN_UNIT(1025828-01)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-3
Damage to calibration data for fundus imaging

Or incorrect recognition of calibration data
● Reconfiguration of fundus calibration data
● Recreating fundus calibration data

● Poor communication between OCT-PCB (1021856-01) and
TRC_M2-PCBUNIT (1022959-01) or GPU_BOARD
(1022298-01)
[Removing the lamp house cover]

● Check the lamp house cover and COVER_SENSOR
(1024566-01)
[EEPROM error of TRC-PCB (1024566-01)]

● Defective TRC-PCB

● Poor communication between OCT-PCB (1021856-01) and
TRC_M2-PCBUNIT (1022959-01) or GPU_BOARD
(1022298-01)
[EEPROM error of OCT-PCB]


● Poor communication between Base_SUB_CPU_PCB
(1021086-01) and TRC_M2-PCBUNIT (1022959-01) or
GPU_BOARD (1022298-01)
[Defective charging of xenon]

● Failure of XE_FLASH_UNIT_M2(1024716-01)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-4
Failure of initialization: Failure to perform initialization of the

main unit firmware when the FPGA cannot be initialized.
● Poor OCT_IMG-BOARD(CIBT4 (4701167000)
[Incorrect connection of Basler cameras]

● Poor power supply
● Defective GPU_BOARD(1022298-01)
● Failure of TRC_M2-PCB (1022959-01)
● COLOR_CAM_P_CBL(1022223-01) or
[Bad initialization]
● Defective Basler cameras (COLOR_CAMERA_USB3
(1022301-01))
[EEPROM error of GPU_BOARD(1022298-01)]

● Defective GPU_ BOARD
[Button battery exhausted for date/time display or reset of date

setting]
● Button battery run out for date/time display
● Resetting Date Settings
● Checking the battery voltage and resetting the date and time
[The status due to communication with an external PC is

abnormal.]
● Inadequate setting of the IP address of the PC and the main
unit
● Incorrect LAN connection status
[The status due to communication with an external PC is

abnormal.]
● Inadequate setting of the IP address of the PC and the main
unit
● Incorrect LAN connection status
[Abnormality in the amount of light before the objective]

● Defective SLD_PWR_CHK-PCB (1012464-01)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-5
Damage to the calibration file for anterior segment imaging

Or incorrect recognition of calibration data
● Reconfiguration of calibration data
● Recreating calibration data
[Communication data from external PC is abnormal.]

● Incorrect connection between the main body of the
instrument and the PC (required restart)
In Y-Auto, lower than or equal to the lower limit

Y-axis auto error (Lower Limit)
When the value is equal to or higher than the upper limit in Y-

Auto
Y-axis auto error (Upper Limit)
No peaks at Y-Auto
Y-axis auto error (no peak)
[Data write failure]

● Defective GPU_BOARD memories, etc.
[Improper reading of calibration data]

● For reading the rescaling data file at startup
Failed (required restart)
[Data read failure]

● Failure to read baseline data from an external PC
● Failure to Search for Baseline in Automatic Follow-up

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-6
[Shooting failed]
● Failure in Auto Alignment Check, etc.
[Inter-Communication Error]
● Full of GPU_BOARD Internal Communication Buffers
● Defective GPU_ BOARD
[Failed configuration changes]

● Poor CIBT or poor communication with the CIBT
(Scan selection, etc.)
[Failure to start image transfer]

● CIBT failure or communication failure between the CIBT
and external PCs
[Failure to start image acquisition]

(Scan selection, etc.)
[Failure to stop image transfer]

(At the end of shooting)
[Data read failure]

● CIBT failure or communication failure between the CIBT
and external PCs
(B-Scan, IR, Color Fundus, etc.)
[Data read failure]

● With poor CIBT or CIBT during 3D scanning
Communication failure

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-7
[Buffer acquisition failure]

● CIBT failure, such as when shooting is finished, or
communication failure with the CIBT
[Data reception failure]

● Incorrect CIBT, such as when receiving follow-up data, or
incorrect communication between the CIBT and external PCs
[Defective initialization]: EEPROM correction value on built-

in PCB is incorrect.
● Defective memories on the PCBs and
GPU_BOARD(1022298-01)
[Defective initialization]: An error occurred during the initial

operation of the TRC focus motor.
● Poor TRC focus
[Defective initialization]: Error occurred during the initial

operation of the split unit.
● Failure of split unit
[Defective initialization]: Error occurred during initial

operation of the diopter correction lens motor.
● Defective diopter correction lens unit

operation of the small pupil aperture motor.
● Defective small pupil diaphragm unit
[Defective initialization]: Error occurred during the initial

operation of the split light shielding rod.
● Failure of split unit

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-8
Defective initialization:
● Failure of BLINK_SENS_PCB (1022321-01)
● Gain deficiencies in Blink coordination
[Image capture failure]

● When acquisition of color fundus fails

operation of the mirror Y-axis motor.
● Y-axis motor malfunction
● Y-axis sensor failure
● Bad BASE_SUB_CPU_PCB (1021086-01)

operation of the optical head.
● X-or Z-axis motor malfunction
● X-or Z-axis sensor failure
● Bad BASE_SUB_CPU_PCB (1021086-01)
[Communication error between CPUs and EEPROM]:

EEPROM compensation values on built-in PCBs are
abnormal.
● Defective memories on the PCBs and
GPU_BOARD(1022298-01)
[Defective initialization]: An error occurred during the initial

operation of the OCT focus motor.
● Poor OCT focus

operation of the optical path length correction motor (timeout
error).
● Poor optical path length correction

operation of the polarization controller motor.
● Polarization controller failure

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-9
[USB connection failure]

● USB memory incompatibility
● Security USB protection
[Defective software version upgrade program file]

● USB memory incompatibility
● USB connection failure
● Damage of the software upgrade program file
● Security USB protection
[Time-out]
● Failure to delete images on the preview screen
[Insufficient USB free space]

● Generated when syslog is exported

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
8-10

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
9-1
9. Check sheet
Use the check sheet to record the adjustments and inspections.
Result
Adjustment items / chapter (chapter) Standard or confirmation items
Standard Judge
Version of main body Ver
Back up
OK·NG
(Export of settings of main body and CLB)
SLD light quantity
CW value : µW
Pulse value : µW
Pulse light width :
Confirmation of Initial CCD Peak value
- Digit OK・NG
condition Y-Peak value:
Interference sensitivity Vit R side only
(record the images for each depth)
40 depth : DN
400 depth : DN
800 depth : DN
PD value of SLD mA
Do not make any damages on the cover.
Disassembly/Assembly 6.1 - OK・NG
Do not drop the screws.
Adjustment of the SLD
SLD intensity at objective lens
light intensity at objective 6.2.2 mW OK・NG
0.58 ~ 0.6 (mW):
lens
Galvano XY sensor width
Y: more than 700 DN DN OK・NG
X: more than 150 DN DN
Adjustment of the light
Record Maximum/Minimum value
intensity sensor at 6.2.3
Light Lower: DN
objective lens Light Upper: DN
OK・NG
Light Upper2: DN
Confirmation
Confirm store to main body. OK・NG
Confirmation of PD PD current value

6.2.4 OK・NG
current value PD current value within±5% (at maker delivery): %
Replacement / Check Condenser voltage after charging completion:

6.2.5 V OK・NG
Xenon PCB About 280 V:
Observation light intensity

uW
Level3: 145 to 165 uW
Light intensity of Level1,2,4 should be close value
Adjustment of the
6.2.6 to the light intensity below. OK・NG
observation light intensity uW
uW
uW
IR LED setting Level3

Adjustment of blink
6.2.7 Opening eyelid:205 to275 DN DN OK・NG
detection
Closing eyelid:820 to 929 DN DN
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
9-2
Center error of photography

mm
φ0.3 or less （3 scale or less）:
Center errorof observation
mm
φ0.3 or less （3 scale or less）:
Check of the photography image
mm
Vertical: within 1mm:
Adjustment of the mm
6.2.8 Horizontal: within 2mm: OK・NG
photography camera
Angle of view
42.75 to 47.25 deg:
deg
Fundus image resolving power
Center: 50 lines/mm or more:
OK・NG
r/2: 40 lines /mm or more:
OK・NG
r: 25 lines/mm or more:
OK・NG
Adjustment value of the RGB
DN
R： within 192±31:
DN
Adjustment of white G： within 96±9:
6.2.9 DN OK・NG
Balance B： within 207±19: DN
「Cyan」 R value： 80DN or more : OK・NG
Check data writing to main body:
Record XY direction position error
(Center deviation of the fixation lamp)
um
X direction:
um
Y direction:
Record Z direction position error

(Deviation of the cornea and iris aperture) um
From design value: within ±200um:
Stereoscopic camera
6.2.10 OK・NG
orientation
Confirm store to main body OK・NG
Auto-alignment
operation confirmation: OK・NG
Accuracy: X and Y 0.3mm or less: mm
Z 0.1mm or less: mm
Resolution chart
0D： chart I: OK・NG
Adjustment of TRC focus 6.2.11 OK・NG
-10D： chart G: OK・NG
+10D： chart I: OK・NG
Split stick shifts
mm
Between left and right: within 0.3mm:
Inclination of split stick
deg
Side of examinee: ±1deg:
Installing the split Vignetting of Split stick
6.2.12 Not present OK·NG OK・NG
unit/adjustment
Split stick position
Either side from center: within ±0.35mm: mm
Upper and lower from center: -0.1 to -0.8mm: mm
Bright line shift:
Lower bright line shifted 1/6 to the left. OK·NG
Split focus
Adjustment of the split bar
6.2.13 +12D: Split bright line 1/6 to 1/4: width OK・NG
focus position
-13D: Split bright line 1/6 to 1/4: width

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
9-3
Position error of internal fixation

Up/down/left/right: width
Split analysis frame within 1/4 of Internal fixation width:
adjustment/Luminance 6.2.14 OK・NG
adjustment Inclination error of internal fixation
Either side difference with the up/down scale width
within 1/5 of Internal fixation width:
R Avg : Dark 11 or less, Diff 18 or less: DN
Adjustment of the center
6.2.15 G Avg : Dark 7 or less, Diff 9.4 or less: DN OK・NG
ghost
B Avg : Dark 5 or less, Diff 4.8 or less: DN
No error is displayed when bootup: OK・NG
Check each power voltage：(⇒2.3.3-(7)): OK・NG
Motor operation, sensor value check:
OK・NG
Compare(⇒(4)-(c))
Check motor operation and sensor value displayed
・TRC focus motor and sensor
・Diopter compensation motor and sensor
・Split motor and sensor OK・NG
・Split I/O motor and sensor
・Aperture changing motor and sensor
・IR compensation motor and sensor
Check LED illumination：
Adjustment of the ・Anterior fixation LED is illuminating.
6.2.16 OK・NG
TRC_M2-PCB ・internal fixation LED is illuminating.
OK・NG
・Anterior observation LED is illuminating.
・Split LED is illuminating.
・retina observation LED is illuminating.
Check LCD reverse：When the LCD is reversed, the
OK・NG
display is reversed:
Check cover detecting sensor operation: OK・NG
Adjust and check the blinking detection sensor
OK・NG
operation:
Check software version::
OK・NG
software version is correct:
Check TRC focus operation
OK・NG
Focus is normal at0D、±10D:
No error is displayed when bootup OK・NG
Adjustment of the
6.2.17 Setting data between GPU board and OCT PCB is OK・NG
OCT_PCB OK・NG
coincided.: Compare
Adjustment when
6.2.18 Photograph and confirm the error is removed. OK・NG OK・NG
replacing GPU_BOARD
Center position:
Pupil position adjustment 6.2.19 mm OK・NG
within 0.1mm (1 scale from scale center):
Center position error:
mm
±0.05mm (within 1 div.):
Galvano adjustment 6.2.20 Inclination error OK・NG
mm
X direction: within 1 div. in the 4mm scan:
mm
Y direction: within 1 div. in the 4mm scan:
Adjustment of the 0D 0D focus: OK・NG
6.2.21 OK・NG
focus for focusing lens Record of 0D sensor position: DN

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
9-4
Deviation
mm
Check of optical axis -33D or less: within 0.60m
6.2.22 mm OK・NG
deviation for focusing lens ±15D: within 0.20mm
mm
+40D or less: 0.25mm
Check of image
Unstableness
unstableness for focusing 6.2.23 OK・NG
: within 0.1mm mm
lens
Record of focus position
Adjustment of OCT DN
6.2.24 +15D: OK・NG
focusing ± 15D focus DN
-15D:
Correction value of scan length DN
X6.0mm Gain: DN
Y6.0mm Gain: DN
Y9.0mm Gain: DN
X12.0mm Gain:
Confirmation
Scan length adjustment 6.2.25 OK・NG
Confirm store to main body: OK・NG
Scan length
X6.0mm±5%: mm
Y6.0mm Gain±5%: mm
X12.0mm Gain±5% （3D wide）: mm
Y9.0mm±5% （3D wide）: mm
Position error of internal fixation
Within the quarter of width of the internal Width
fixation (up/down/left/right):
Adjustment of the internal Inclination error of internal fixation
6.2.26 OK・NG
fixation LCD position Within the one fifth of width of the internal Width
fixation as a difference between left and right:
Focus difference of internal fixation:: D
Adjust the difference of focus within 0.26D.
Cornea aperture
mm
Φ3.3mm±0.1mm:
Iris aperture (from the scale center)
mm
Eccentricity: X axis within 0.025mm:
mm
Adjustment of the aperture Y axis within 0.025mm:
6.2.27 mm OK・NG
selector unit position Diameter: 5.2mm ±0.1mm:
Crystalline lens aperture (Normal) (Against the Iris
aperture)
mm
Eccentricity: within 0.12mm XY:
mm
Diameter: 4.3mm ±0.1mm:
Adjustment of
Spectrometer 6.2.28 Value of Y-Peak: 5 times within 700±70: OK・NG OK・NG
Match between results of the scan range and the

CCD shift 6.2.29 OK・NG OK・NG
tool scale:
Rescaling 6.2.30 Start-up with no error: OK・NG OK・NG
Fluctuation of the probe light

Adjusting the optical path
6.2.31 Difference of min value and max value OK・NG
length
0.9 or more (calculation) :
Confirmation and Sensitivity of interference signal
40pixel: 97dB or more: dB
adjustment of interference 6.2.32 OK・NG
400pixel: 91dB or more: dB
sensitivity 600pixel: 83dB or more: dB

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
9-5
Replacement of fiber unit 6.2.33 Unit exchange OK・NG OK・NG
OCT focus lens position

Record 40D position: DN
Record Anterior focus position: DN
Confirm store to main body(Anterior): OK・NG
Reference mirror position
Cornea position: DN
Deep position: DN
Numerical dispersion compensation coefficient DN
OK・NG
Anterior OCT calibration
Confirm store to main body: OK・NG
Restart: OK・NG
Scan length
Scan length: within 6mm ± 5%: OK・NG
X Galvano gain: mm
Y Galvano gain: mm
File name of scan length .fds: .fds
Correction of curvature
OK・NG
Error of curvature: within 5%:
.fds
File name of curvature .fds:
OK・NG
Restart:
6.2.34
Anterior OCT Calibration CCD shift
OK・NG
Store of correction value :
OK・NG
Restart
Scale
Difference: within 1 scale div. of tool
Vertical resolving power
File name of vertical .fds
.fds
Resolving power:
OK・NG
Separating the upper line is a three-layer:
OK・NG
Horizontal resolving power
Resolving power: Determine the jagged OK・NG
Thickness
File name of thickness .fds: .fds
Error of caliper length: ±5%: %
Angle
Caliper value: 16.28 to 16.93: DN
File name of angle .fds: .fds
Position
52+/-73µm: µm
Replacement of the OCT

6.2.35 Dip switch is set: OK・NG OK・NG
IMG Board
Position of mirror body : lowest OK·NG
Packing mode - OK·NG
Position of chin-rest : lowest OK·NG

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
9-6

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-1
10. TOOL LIST

10.1 Special tool list
Usage
Tool No. Tool name Image Application
rank
Reference for
OCT-1-01 A Object holder
mounting tools
Diopter compensation Diopter

OCT-1-02 C
check tool (-13/+12) compensation
Black spot/ghost
Black spot lens/center check
OCT-1-04 A
ghost check tool Black spot position
adjustment
Focusing 0D position Observation camera

OCT-1-06 B
check tool (IR) focus adjustment
Internal fixation focus Internal fixation

OCT-1-07 C
check tool focus check
Observation lens
CT-1-09 B Focusing tool
position adjustment
Split focusing test eye Sensor position

OCT-1-10 C
(+10D/0D/-10D) compensation
Installation and removal

Objective lens fixation ring
OCT-1-11 C of the objective lens
fastening tool
fixation ring

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-2
Usage
rank
Position adjustment
Interference position
OCT-1-12 B of
check tool
Corner cube
Focus slide tool of the Adjustment of the focus

OCT-1-14 B
Fourier transform lens in Fourier lens
OCT focusing
OCT-1-15 B OCT 0D focus check tool
adjustment
Galvano OCT optical

Galvano position
OCT-1-16 B axis adjustment check
adjustment
tool
OCT pupil position check Pupil position

OCT-1-17 C
tool adjustment
Scan length check

OCT-1-19 C Scan length 0D tool
CCD shift
Interference position
OCT-1-20 A Mirror tool
adjustment
Include 1.8,3.8mm
OCT-1-23 C Anterior tool holder
spacer
Anterior OCT vertical Check of vertical

OCT-1-24 C
thickness tool resolution

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-3
Usage
rank
Anterior OCT horizontal Check of horizontal

OCT-1-25 C
thickness tool resolution
Anterior OCT standard value

OCT-1-26 C Check of standard value
check tool
Anterior OCT thickness

check tool
Adjustment of Anterior
OCT-1-27 C (Reference of the attached
thickness
value of thickness and
refractive at 840 nm)
OCT-1-28 C Scan length check tool Confirm the Scan length
OCT Focusing lens

OCT focus
OCT-1-29 C Image-forming performance
Misalignment check
check tool
Stereo matching Stereo matching

OCT-1-31 C
adjustment B tool adjustment
Split unit position

OCT-1-32 C Split image check tool
adjustment
Anterior CCD camera

OCT-1-33 C Anterior CCD filter
adjustment
Anterior segment
Stereo matching check
OCT-1-34 C CCD operation
tool
distance check
Torque screwdriver Used to tighten the

OCT-1-35 A
(20 ~120cNm) tapping screw
With M2/M2.5/M3 bit
Anterior segment angle

OCT-1-36 C confirmation check tool

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-4
Usage
rank
Anterior segment radius of

OCT-1-37 C
curvature check tool (R8)
OCT-1-38 C Split 2 hole aperture tool
Aperture adjustment
OCT-1-39 C
telescope
OCT-1-40 B WB compensation tool
Hexagonal wrench
OCT-1-41 B
(for adjusting black spot)
Anterior segment OCT focus

OCT-1-42 C position adjustment tool
Blink detection
OCT-1-43 B
adjustment tool (A)
OCT-1-50 B Power supply DC-700
OCT-1-51 B Tamron M118FM16

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-5
Usage
rank
Torque screwdriver bit

OCT-1-54 A
VESSEL No.AC161100
Video to USB2.0
OCT-1-55 B converter
DFG/USB2pro
CPC3440-02 cable
OCT-1-56 B
BNC-BNC 2m cable
OCT-1-57 B USB cable: A-B type
Blink detection
OCT-1-58 B
adjustment tool (B)
Hexagonal wrench
OCT-1-60 B
TTX-15
OCT-1-63 B Tool adapter (large)
OCT-1-64 B Tool adapter (small)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-6
Usage
rank
OCT-1-65 A Binocular Test Eye
OCT-1-66 C Spectro scope Holder Plate
1032054-01 C Line CCD extension cable
Check the focus with

SL-01 C Diopter telescope
diopter
OCT-1000
C IR card
-03
OCT-1000
A Power Meter Light volume adjustment
-04
OCT-1000
A Fiber cleaner
-05
OCT-2000-12 SLD cable 2K
OCT-2000-23 Superlum power tool
OCT-2000-24 B Blink detection check tool

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-7
Usage
rank
TRC-NW400-
B Xe Light Power meter
02
TRC-
C ISO Model Eye
NW400-04
In case of using CCD

camera which is not
40423 SONNY XC-EI50/2,
B SONY XC-EI50/2
68000 IR LED may be set
[ON] to make the
scale clear.
- C Objective Lens Cap for RGB
10.2 Tool software

Tool software name Application Image
3DOCT-1_GraphTool OCT adjustment
3DOCT-1_ AdjustBaslerCamera Basler camera W/B adjustment
CameraPositionAdjust Basler camera position adjustment
CalibrationMakeTool Make Calibration
Main_rescale2Exe Make Rescaling(Fundus) Calibration

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-8
AnteriorCalibrationMakeToolForMaestro Make Anterior Calibration
AnteriorOctEvaluation Measure Angle in Anterior
SendCalibrationData Calibration file transmission
3DOCT-1_SendAlignmentParameter Auto alignment parameters transmission
StereoCameraMeasuringTool Stereoscopic camera orientation
Pylon Viewer Used to capture CCD image
IC Capture Used to capture CCD image
NWTool For RGB Calculation
Maestro2_CCDShift For CCD shift
For Adjustment of the light intensity sensor at

MaestroⅡ_LightAdjustment
objective lens
10.3 General repair tools

• Synchroscope
• Voltage meter
• Set of six Phillips screwdrivers
• Set of four slotted screwdrivers
• 3mm wooden-handle screwdriver
• Set of hexagonal wrenches
• Converter Connector of BNC Jack to RCA pin
• Lens cleaner
• Personal computer
• LAN cable
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-9
• USB memory
• Brower
• Cotton ciegal
• Finger sack

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
10-10

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-1
11. Appendix
11.1 Cleaning of the objective lens
Purpose
Cleaning of TAIBUTU_LENS_G605M8085（1024478-01）
Necessary tools
Tool name Tool No. Appearance
Objective lens fixation ring fastening tool OCT-1-11
Blower -
Cotton ciegal(or MicroStar) -
Finger sack -
s
Ethanol -
(For soil removal)
Finishing solvent -
Repair workshop: Recommended solvent like 3M Novec
User (user's manual): Hyper Clean 6310 (Manufacturer:
GAKUNAN CHEMICAL CO., LTD.
Procedure
(1) The confirmation of the dirt
(a) When confirming the dirt on the lens, use the white LED light of more than 80-lx luminous power or
the like.
(2) Cleaning of the objective lens
• Be sure to wear a finger sack to prevent contamination of the lens and foreign matter.
(a) Clean the surface of the lens.

i Blow dirt and dust which is on the lens surface using Blower.
ii Clean the surface with the cotton ciegal soaked in alcohol to remove the dirt.
Wipe dirt, dust and the wiping residue, confirming it including scratches by using the LED light of more
than 80-lx luminous power.
As the finish, wipe to the outside to make a circle from the center using the recommended solvent like
3M Novec.
Confirm the wiping residue by breathing on the lens.
• Clean the cotton Seagull while replacing it with a new one.
• If dirt or wipe remains, the center ghost will become darker.
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-2
Cotton Seagal
TOPCON
Recommended
solvent
iii Wipe the corner of the lens with the tip of a cotton ciegal that is folded to be sharp.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-3
11.2 Galvano mirror cleaning

Purpose
Cleaning of grease, dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the galvanometer mirror due to a
decrease in the reflectivity of the amount of light from the galvanometer mirror in the event of a
decrease in the amount of light in front of the objective len, a low image quality value (IQV), or
an error message ("Does the resolution of the tomographic image deteriorate? (2011/2014)?")
• Only those who participated in repair training sessions at TOPCON are allowed to
participate.
• This should be done only if it cannot be removed with a blower.
Necessary Tools
Cleaning swab -
(VSGO APS-C SENSOR CLEANING SWAB KIT
MODEL: DDR-15)
TOPCON recommended hydrocarbon cleaning solutions -

such as SH-11 or Hyperclean EE-6310
(Hereinafter, solvent)
Blower -
Projector -
(Penlight, etc., Alternative)
Procedure
(1) Remove the Galvano mirror (X) and the Galvano mirror (Y).
( section 6.1.20, Galvano unit (X), (Y) removed,  section 11.3, OCT optical system cleaning)
• Rotate the galvanometer mirror and move the protruding part of the mirror to the screw
hole position of the galvano holder and remove it.
(2) Blower large dust, dust, etc. adhering to the galvano mirror surface.
(3) Wipe the Galvano mirror surface by soaking the cleaning swab with solvent.
• Wipe in one direction to remove dirt and dust.
• Keep the cleaning swab pressed to 0.1N or less.
• If the surface of the Galvano mirror becomes whiter, be careful because dust
accumulated at the tip of the cleaning swab may get caught and damage the surface of
the Galvano mirror.
• Discard the cleaning swab used once and always use a new one.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-4
Cleaning in one direction
(4) Illuminate the surface of the galvano mirror with a projector, etc. to confirm that no dirt or dust remains.
Before cleaning After cleaning
(5) Perform (3) again if cleaning is insufficient.

(6) Remove dust accumulated inside the galvano holder with a blower, and reinstall the galvano mirror.
• When removing the Galvano holder, perform Galvano Adjustment ( section 6.2.20,
6.2.25, 6.2.29)

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-5
11.3 OCT optical cleaning

Purpose
Clean the OCT optical system at the time of maintenance and inspection or in the event of
center ghost.
Necessary tools
Blower -
Cotton ciegal -
Solvent (alcohol) -
• This work shall be performed in the clean room.
Procedure
(1) Remove the cover from the main unit (section 6.1.4).
(2) Remove the dust of the instrument and inside the cover by the blower.
(3) Remove the four screws circled in the following figure and remove the fiber cover.
(4) Mark the collimator with a marker pen as shown in the following figure. Loosen the two circled screws,
remove the collimator, and remove the fiber connected from the fiber stopper pin to the collimator.
Mark from the

collimator to the holder
with a noticeable color

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-6
(5) Engage the collimator in the fiber base hook as shown in the following figure.
(6) Remove the two galvano connection cables (X and Y) from the galvano body.
(7) Remove the two cover fixing screws CR 2x4S and two galvano fixing screws of the dust guard plate.
Galvano connection
cable
Remove the two galvano fixing

screws CR 3×12S
Galvano Y
Galvano X
(8) Remove the galvano.

Remove the galvano by moving it downward. (↓ arrow)
Downward the
Galvano parts

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-7
(9) Blow away the dust accumulated in the galvano holder with a blower.
Blow away the dust on the upper surface of the dispersion compensation rod and the surface of the
galvano mirror.
(10) Clean the upper surface of the dispersion compensation rod.
Soak lens-cleaning tissue with alcohol and wipe lightly.
• Do not rub strongly. Residual solvent and scratches on the surface are not allowable.
Upper surface of the

dispersion compensation lens
Galvano mirror.
(11) Clean the X and Y Galvano mirror surfaces (section 11.2).

(12) Wipe the galvano side of the OCT focus lens.
Soak lens-cleaning tissue with alcohol and wipe lightly.
(13) Install the galvano to the body. Tighten the two cover fixing screws CR 2×4S and two galvano fixing
screws.
• Ensure to insert the two positioning pins into the pin holes.
• The upper surface of the dispersion compensation lens shall not contact any other parts.
• If the degradation is observed in the dustproof sponge around the galvano holder,
replace it ( section 11.4).
OCT focus lens
Pin hole
Positioning pin
(14) Connect the galvano connection cables to the galvano mirror Y.

(15) Align the rotation direction with the mark made by a marker pen in procedure (4) and return the
collimator.
(16) Insert the fiber plate into the fiber fixing pin.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-8
(17) Galvano adjustment (section 6.2.20)

(18) Adjustment of the SLD light intensity at objective lens (section 6.2.2)
(19) Adjustment of the light intensity sensor at objective lens (section 6.2.3)
(20) Pupil position adjustment (section 6.2.19)
(21) Confirmation and adjustment of interference sensitivity (section 6.2.32)
(22) Adjustment of the 0D focus for focusing lens (section 6.2.21)
(23) Light path length compensation mechanism adjustment (section 6.2.31)
(24) Scan length adjustment (section 6.2.25)
(25) CCD shift(section 6.2.29)
(26) Anterior OCT Calibration (section 6.2.34)
(27) Attach the main unit cover (section 6.1.4).
(28) To check the capture, connect the main unit and PC, start the IMAGEnet6, and shoot the 3D optic disc (3
D Disc) and the radial B-scan image to check that the image can be captured normally.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-9
11.4 Pasting dustproof tape · sponge

• Whiling repair work, if dust, dirt, etc. are attached to the optical system, it will affect
shooting, so we recommend that this operation should be done in a clean room, clean
booth. Also, please do not touch the optical system for disassembly / assembly
adjustment, please be careful not to wear dust.
Purpose
How to attach the dust proof tape and the sponge when it comes off.
Necessary tools
Dust proof tape and sponge - -
Insulation tape (TERAOKA SEISAKUSHO CO.,LTD -

acetate cloth tape No.571S)
Procedure
(1) FAN unit part
(a) Attach SPONGE (1024721-01) to CPU FAN UNIT (1025808-01). (See the figure below)
SPONGE（1024721-01）
Adjust the lower side of SPONGE
according to the position of the
metal plate and attach it to the side
surface of the FAN.
Pass the cable under the SPONGE.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-10
(2) Objective lens cell

(a) Cover the tool pin hole of the objective lens cell with black tape. (See the figure below)
Tool pin hole Attach the tape along the V groove
20
40

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-11
(b) Attach the object cover in the notch position shown below.
Object cover
(3) Dustproof around Galvano

(a) Attach the dustproof sponge (4701040470) along the inner corner of the galvano holder (470104030A)
as shown in the lower left figure. Start from the edge and fold the remaining part outward. Also, be
careful not to get out of the dotted line shown in the lower right figure. (Because the sponge is not
caught between the collimator holder (1029566-01) and the galvano holder.)
Start from the edge (within 1 mm).

The remaining part should be folded back to the outside.
Galvano holder Dustproof sponge Collimator holder

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-12
(b) Attach the galvano dustproof sponge (1009497-01) to the galvano holder (470104030A).
Attach it to the outer stepped surface as shown in the figure below and fold inward.
Also, be careful not to leave a gap in the red circle part where the dustproof sponge (4701040470) is
matched.
Galvano dustproof sponge Wrap it inward.
Adjust the end to the

stepped surface.
Care should be taken not to leave

gaps in the part where the dustproof
sponge (4701040470) is joined.
Galvano holder
(c) After installing to the galvano base metal plate, as shown in the figure below, make sure that the
REFFERENCE UNIT (1010838-01) moves up and down smoothly without getting caught, and confirm
that there is no gap between the REFFERENCE UNIT.
REFFERENCE UNIT
Galvano base sheet metal
When moving the optical path

correcting base, confirm that it is
not caught and there is no gap.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-13
11.5 Cable wiring method

Purpose
The wiring method of the cable after repair and replacement of various parts is described.
Necessary tools:None
Procedure
(1) XZ Motor section
(a) Adjust the cable of the sensor so that it is not rubbed with sheet metal, and secure the motor and the
cable of the sensor with a binding band. (Bundle line position: 60 mm from connector end)
60mm
※ Do not attach a clamping material to the motor itself because the adhesive tape may be peeled off due to the heat
generated by the motor.
NG case
(b) Protect the cable outlet from the sheet metal edge.
When the Z motor and sensor cable are pulled out, do not get caught in the operating part.
Tighten the tie bands of red circles with a

margin (tighten them together with a
screwdriver, etc. of about φ6).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-14
(c) Set 1026849-01 (PLWS-1U) to the switch power supply cover sheet metal and pull it up to the mirror
from the X motor cable and jaw receiving cable.
(2) Y motor
(a) Fix the Y cable for the operating unit.
(3) Pedestal part

(a) Draw the xenon control cable from the back side of the base board.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-15
(4) Line camera power supply

(a) Attach a ground clamp (448026148_) to approximately the center of the conductive spiral.
(5) LAN/USB cable section

(a) Make sure that the USB and LAN cables do not cross each other.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-16
(b) Ensure clearance to prevent interference between the internal fixation extension cable and the
LAN/USB harness.
LAN/USB harness
Internal fixation
Internal fixation extension cable is routed via flat extension cable
cable clamp (1026853-01)
(c) Adjust excess cable.

Adjust the surplus while applying tension so that the LAN/USB harness does not interfere with the
internal fixation extension cable.
(6) Power base

(a) Draw the USB cable and LAN cable from the chassis and clamp them. Adjust the excess of LAN cable
with the binding band.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-17
(b) Wire the XYZ Motor Cable and the Jaw Receiving Cable approximately in alignment without twisting.
(c) The screw fixing timer mount (1027213-01) and the cable fixing position are stopped near the bundle
band of the USB and LAN cables.
(7) Mirror body

(a) If the IRLED cable and split-LED cable are long, adjust the excess.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-18
(b) Secure the camera power cable with the push-mount tie (1026880-01).
Left Side：
LAN/USB cable
Power cable
PROTECTIVE EARTH cable
Right-side Side：
Chin-rest cable
Motor and sensor cable

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-19
(8) LCD unit

(a) Route the cable and connector so that it does not impose a burden on the cable and connector.
Secure the cables together with the push-mount tie.
(b) Wire the LCD reversing cable after other wiring so that it does not touch the edge of the sheet metal.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-20
(9) Camera Link Cable

(a) Attach the ground clamp (448026148_) to the two camera link cables.
(b) Wire the camera link cable without bulging it outward.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-21
(10) Stereo camera synchronous cable

(a) Attach the earth clamp (44802 6145_) to the stereo camera synchronization cable.
Precautions for mounting:
• Place it on the right side as much as possible.
• Avoid grounding clamps on the sheath.
(11) Galvano control PCB connection

(a) As shown in the figure below, the cables that are wired from the LCD side should be routed from the
right side.
Connect the cable to the connector with a gentle R

bend to prevent tension on the connector.
(Note interference with the cover)
(b) Do not push cables from the objective side between the GPU board and the galvano control board.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-22
11.6 Items and Functions of Graph tool Software
① ② ④
⑨
⑥ ③
⑭
⑪
⑩
⑧
⑦
⑫
⑬
Number Labeling, etc. Function Setting
① Double hump output of - -
the SLD module
② ① of Absolute value Vertical axis [arb. unit] -
display after FFT Horizontal axis Depth (or Z) [pix,]
calculation
③ ② of Power display Equivalent to 20log 10 |Amplitude| -
Vertical axis [dB]
Horizontal axis Depth (or Z) [pix,]
④ Fundus observation image It is not displayed in MaestroⅡ -
⑤ Dispersion compensation For the dispersion compensation secondary Dispersion compensation
and tertiary coefficients secondary and tertiary
Search for optimum values coefficients
(Only when [Search] in ⑬ is pressed.) Search for optimal values
Live display of dispersion compensation
status
(Only when [Monitor] in ⑬ is pressed)
⑥ Moving of Axial Length Move with the arrow button of Left and -
Correction Mechanism Right.
Move to the reference position by [0]
button.
⑦ Moving of Polarization Move with the arrow button of Left and -
controller Right. Move to the reference position by
[0] button.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-23
⑧ Scale[x1] [x2] Zero-padding length at FFT Adjustment time: [x1]

[x4][x8] button Measurement time: [x8]
※Use [x1] for adjustment
because [x8] gives more accurate
values but updating speed is
slower.
[SLD-ON] button ON/OFF of SLD light source [SLD-ON]
[SLD-OFF] button
GL-START buttons ON/OFF of Galvano scan [GL-Stop]
GL-STOP buttons
GRAPH ON/OFF of B-scan live images -
⑨ Signal[start]～[end] ②For the interfering signal peak of (3) [20]～[850]
Z search range [pix.]
Noise[start]～[end] ②The Z range [pix.] of the noise of (3). [850]～[900]
This function is valid only when the
Removal FPN is not checked.
Pickup Line ①Select the A-scan to be displayed. [0]～[1023]
[left]～[right] When [left]=[right], the A-scan.
When [left]≠[right],
The mean of the A-scan in that region.
Spectrum ①Select the display range of the horizontal [0]～[1528]
[X-Min]～[X-max] axis. ※Change the FBG position
when finding it.
Spectrum ①Select the display range of the vertical [0]～[1023]
[Y-Min]～[Y-max] axis.
Amp(linear) ②Select the displayrange of the horizontal [0]～[1023]
[X-Min]～[X-max] axis.
Amp(linear) ②Select the display range of the vertical [0]～[300000]
[Y-Min]～[Y-max] axis.
Power(log) ③Select the display range of the horizontal [0]～[1023]
[X-Min]～[X-max] axis.
Power(log) ③Select the display range of the vertical [30]～[120]
[Y-Min]～[Y-max] axis of.
⑩ □Window Function ON/OFF of the window function during ☑

FFT processing
□Removal FPN; Reduce the fixed pattern noise (FPN). ☑
□Disp Comp; ON/OFF of Numerical dispersion ☑
(QM)[Modify] button compensation Do not press [Modify].
2nd[ ]、3rd[ ] Secondary and tertiary coefficients of 2nd[-10]、3rd[0]
numerical variance compensation ※Change for the device-specific
optimal values.
For 2nd and 3rd Second and third orders of numerical -
Scale bar. dispersion compensation
Continuously change the coefficient of
[Monitor] buttons Live display ON/OFF of dispersion -
compensation status
[Search] buttons Dispersion compensation secondary and Press [Search] buttons.
tertiary coefficients
Optimal value search ON/OFF
Range,+-[ ] Dispersion compensation secondary and [5]
tertiary coefficients
Search range for the optimal value

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-24
⑪ [Signal]-[Noise] SNR calculation without ND loss -

=[SNR] compensation
[SNR]+[ND] Calculation of coherence sensitivity ND[***]
=[Sens.] (SNR compensated for ND loss) ※Change of the ND filter value is
※To the value of ND for the round trip of unique for each tool.
the ND 0.1 to be used
Loss [dB]. How to find one-way ND0.1
Square of the ratio between the amount of
incident light and the amount of emitted
light.
ND-loss = 20log 10 (output/input) [dB]
[Vit-R]、[Cho-N] During Vitreous/Choroidal mode [Vit-R]
Button Change each parameter display field.
PeakZ Z position [pix] of the interference signal -
peak in ②,③
SNR SNR value in ③ -
AmpFWHM Full width at half maximum [pix] of the -
interfering signal waveform of ②
PSF FWHM Full width at half maximum [pix] of the -
interfering signal waveform
Change due to Zero-padding of ③.
-3dB width −3 dB width of the interfering signal -
waveform
(full width at half maximum) [pix] of ③
-10dB −10 dB width [pix] of the interfering signal -
waveform of ③
waveform of ③
waveform of ③
[Save BG Spec] buttons Obtain Back Ground when FPNs are ※When the state of polarization
reduced. changes, the background for FPN
removal changes. Therefore,
acquire periodically. Note also
that pressing the [Save BG Spec]
button causes the Galvano to
begin scanning.
Average[ ]times N numbers of each number (average) in blue [100]
SNR Avg Average value of the SNR -
Signal Avg Average value of the interference signal -
Noise Avg Average value of Noise -
Sens. Avg Average value of the interference sensitivity -
⑫ [Rec Prof.] buttons Outputs the waveform data shown in ②, ③. -

[Save Spec] buttons ①Outputs the waveform data of. -
[Save RAW] buttons ①RAW output of waveform data -
[Save Client] buttons BMP image output on the screen -
⑬ Directory Specifying the directory destination for data C:\SpecCalib\******
output
File Name Filename of the data output Res00***
⑭ AF[0] button [0] is the focusing lens reference position. -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-25
11.7 Connecting CCD-Camera

11.7.1 SONY XC-EI50
Purpose
How to connect the CCD-camera (SONY XC-EI50) used at the time of adjusting the CCD-
camera (CCD-camera) is described.
Necessary tools
SONY XC-EI 50 (hereinafter referred to as CCD-Camera) 40423 68000
(Example) Tamron M118FM25 (Lenses) OCT-1-53

※ Set the lens to be actually used.
SUPPLY MAINS DC-700 OCT-1-50
CPC3440-02 cables OCT-1-56

BNC-BNC2m cables
USB cable A-B type OCT-1-57

(For OCT-1-55)
PC -
Procedure
(1) Mount the CCD camera and lens.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-26
(2) Connect the power cable of the power DC-700 to the camera and connect the camera with the CPC3440-
02 cable.
CPC3440-02 cables Power cable
(3) Connect the Converter Connector of BNC Jack to RCA pin to the COMP of the Video to USB2.0
converter DFG/USB2pro.
Converter Connector of BNC Jack

To RCA pin
(4) Connect the Video to USB2.0 converter DFG/USB2pro (connected in the previous step (3)) and the power
DC-700 with BNC-BNC2m cables.
BNC-BNC2m cables
(5) Connect the Video to USB2.0 converter DFG/USB2pro and PC with USB cable A-B type.
USB cable A-B type

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-27
11.7.2 Basler(USB3.0 type)

Purpose
How to connect the CCD-camera (Basler USB3.0 type) used at the time of adjusting the CCD-
camera (CCD-camera) is described.
Necessary tools
Basler camera (USB3.0 type) OCT-1-xx
acA1600-20um
Cable USB 3.0, Micro B screw lock/A, 3m - data cable OCT-1-xx’
(Example) Tamron M118FM25 (Lenses) OCT-1-53

※ Set the lens to be actually used.
pylon Viewer -
PC -
Procedure
(1) Pylon viewer installation procedure
• Install on PC with USB 3.0 port.
(a) Launch Pylon viewer installer.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-28
(b) Check "I agree to the pylon Terms & Conditions" and click "Next".
(c) Select "Camera User" and click "Next".
(d) Select "USB" and click "Next".

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-29
(e) Select an arbitrary folder and click "Next".
(f) Click [Install].
(g) The installation begins. Wait for several minutes to complete.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-30
(h) Click [Close].

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-31
(2) Setting of pylon Viewer

(a) Connect the Basler camera to the USB 3.0 port of the PC.
(b) Start pylon Viewer.
(c) Click "View" - "Features [Basler ac ...]".
Click "Features [Basler ac ...]".

If the [Basler ac ...] part is not displayed,
check the camera connection.
(d) Set User Level to "Guru".

(e) Open Acquisition Control.
(f) Select Trigger Mode (see the figure below).
Open Acquisition Control.
Trigger Mode ON: Still image

Trigger Mode OFF: Live image
Set User Level to "Guru".

Trigger Mode can be set.
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-32
(g) Click "Camera" - "Continuous Shot".
Click Continuous Shot.

Trigger Mode ON: The state becomes ready
for shooting.
Trigger Mode OFF: Live images are displayed
(h) For still images, tap CAN SEND TOOL - "Motor Ctl 1/2" - "Fundus Capture" - [Capture] to shoot.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-33
11.8 GENERAL INFORMATION ON USAGE AND MAINTENANCE

11.8.1 INTENDED PATIENT POPULATION
The patient who undergoes an examination by this instrument must maintain concentration for
a few minutes and adhere to the following instructions:
• After his/her face to the chinrest, forehead rest.
• Keep the eye open.
• Understand and follow instructions when undergoing an examination.
If the patient does not conform to these conditions, it is not possible to take a picture correctly.
11.8.2 INTENDED USER PROFILE

The 3D OCT-1 3D Optical Coherence Tomography is an electric instrument for medical use.
Use this instrument under a doctor's guidance.
11.8.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR USE

Temperature : 10°C to 35°C
Humidity : 30% to 90% (non-condensing)
Pressure : 800hPa to 1060hPa
11.8.4 STORAGE, USAGE PERIOD

(1) Storage (without wrapping (without package))
* Temperature : 10°C to 40°C
Humidity : 10% to 95% (without dew condensation)
* THIS INSTRUMENT DOES NOT MEET THE TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS OF ISO 15004-
FOR STORAGE. DO NOT STORE THIS INSTRUMENT IN CONDITIONS WHERE THE
TEMPERATURE MAY RISE ABOVE 40°C OR FALL BELOW 10°C.
(2) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR PACKAGING IN STORAGE
Temperature : -20°C to 50°C
Humidity : 10% to 95%
(3) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR PACKAGING IN TRANSPORTAION
Temperature : -40°C to 70°C
Humidity : 10% to 95%
(4) When storing the instrument, ensure that the following conditions are met:
(a) The instrument must not be splashed with water.
(b) Do not store the instrument in an environment where air pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation,
sunlight, dust, salty/sulfurous air, etc. could cause damage.
(c) Do not store or transport the instrument on a slanted or uneven surface or in an area where it is subject
to vibrations or instability.
(d) Do not store the instrument where chemicals are stored or gas is generated.
(5) Normal life span of the instrument:

8 years from delivery providing regular maintenance is performed (according to the self-certification
[TOPCON data])

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-34
(6) Warranty repair

In the event of a failure of the product under normal use conditions, we have the provisions set forth in the
product Warranty Form.
Repair based on this. Please refer to the warranty.
(7) Repair after the warranty period
If the function can be maintained by repair, consider pay-per-view repair at the customer's request.-i.e...
(8) Maintenance period
8 years after completion of production of the product, support for repair will be provided.
11.8.5 ELECTRIC RATING

Source voltage : AC 100 - 240V 50-60Hz
Power input : 70 - 150VA
11.8.6 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION

• Types of protection against electric shock: This instrument is classified as Class I equipment.
Class I equipment does not depend only on basic insulation for protection against electric shock, but also
provides a means of connection to a protective earth system so that metal parts that come into contact do
not become conductive if the basic insulation fails.
• Grade of protection against electric shock: This instrument is classified as Type B applied part.
Type B applied part provides a specified grade of protection to prevent electric shock, particularly
forreliability against current leaks, measuring current and protective earth current (in case of Class I
equipment).
• Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: IPx0
The 3D OCT-1 has no protection against ingress of water. (The degree of protection against harmful
ingress of water defined in IEC 60529 is IPx0.)
• Classification according to the method(s) of sterilization or disinfection recommended by the
manufacturer: not applicable. The 3D OCT-1 has no part to be sterilized or disinfected.
• Classification according to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anesthetic
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a
flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide. The 3D OCT-1 should be used
in environments where no flammable anesthetics and/or flammable gases are present.
• Classification according to the mode of operation: Continuous operation.
Continuous operation is the operation under normal load for an unlimited period, without the specified
limits of temperature being exceeded.
(1) Class of insulation transformer

• Types of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment
• Grade of protection against electric shock: This device is not equipped with the part applied to this
protection grade.
11.8.7 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensions : 340 - 483mm (W) × 543 - 680mm (D) × 500 - 732mm (H)
Weight : 25kg

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-35
11.9 Electromagnetic compatibility

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-36

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-37

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-38

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-39
11.9.1 Requirements for the EXTERNAL DEVICE

The external device connected to the analog and digital interfaces must comply with the
respective IEC or ISO standards (e.g. IEC 60950-1 for data processing equipment and IEC
60601-1 for medical equipment).
Anybody connecting additional equipment to medical electrical equipment configures a
medical system and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements for
medical electrical systems.
Attention is drawn to the fact that local laws take priority over the above mentioned
requirements.
If in doubt, contact your dealer or TOPCON(see the back cover).

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-40
11.9.2 PATIENT’S ENVIRONMENT
• Don't connect an additional power strip or an extension cord to the system.

• Don't connect any device which is not recognized as one component of the system.
• The total 1kVA is the maximum allowable load of the auxiliary power supply socket
for the insulation transformer, which is provided for the system.
Don't connect the device exceeding this capacity.
• Use the auxiliary power supply socket of the insulation transformer to power only a
device that will be a component of the system.
• It is dangerous to connect any device which is not used as a component of the system,
to the insulation transformer.
• When the insulation transformer is not used, the personal computer and the monitor for
the personal computer must be installed out of the patient's environment.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-41
11.9.3 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE PERSONAL COMPUTER

(COMMERCIALPRODUCT) TO BE CONNECTED
Please refer to the user manual of the analysis software.
• The person who uses this software and the personal computer in which this
software is activated must manage his/her ID and password correctly with full
care in order to prevent the third party from using his/her ID and password.
• Manage the administrator password of the database, which is used for this
software, correctly with full care in order to prevent the third party from using
the password.
• When you use this software on the personal computer connected to a network, ensure
security properly and fully in order to prevent the infection with computer virus, leak
of information and other troubles.
• When using this software on the client server system, it is assumed that the data and
database files will be placed on the network. Manage the folders which save these files
and the access right to the files correctly.
• Manage the personal computer and media (recording media), which save the data
obtained and backed up by this software, correctly in order to prevent the computer and
media from being wrongly used or taken out by the third party.
11.9.4 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE INSULATION TRANSFORMER

(COMMERCIALPRODUCT) TO BE CONNECTED

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-42
11.10 3D OCT-1 SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS

11.10.1 PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING “LICENSE TERMS” CAREFULLY
BEFORE USING OR INSTALLING THIS SOFTWARE!
This software includes the "Qt" software licensed by Digia Plc (Head office: Finland).
ANY AND ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE “LICENSE TERMS” SHALL BE DEEMED TO
BE ACCEPTED AND AGREED BY YOU IF YOU USE THIS SOFTWARE.
The 3D OCT-1 Software, including its instruction manual and other documents, contained in this package
comprises copyrightable works of TOPCON CORPORATION protected by copyright laws and is licensed,
not sold. Digia Plc and its licenser possess the copyright and the intellectual property right of the "Qt"
software installed in 3D OCT-1.
TOPCON CORPORATION grants to you the right to use this 3D OCT-1 Software under the terms and
conditions outlined below.
11.10.2 LICENSE TERMS

(1) LICENSE
Subject to the terms and conditions outlined in these LICENSE TERMS, TOPCON CORPORATION
("TOPCON") hereby grants to you ("USER") a non-exclusive and non-transferable license ("LICENSE") to
use the 3D OCT-1 SOFTWARE (including the "Qt" software ("Qt")) including its instruction manual and
other documents (separately or collectively the "SOFTWARE") only on the 3D OCT-1 instrument you use
("INSTRUMENT").
(2) RESTRICTION
(a) USER shall NOT:
i use the SOFTWARE on or with any computer or machine other than the INSTRUMENT, or
ii make any copy of part or whole of the SOFTWARE and distribute the copy; or
iii disclose this software to the third party; or
iv sell, assign, exchange, pass, rent, lease or otherwise dispose of the SOFTWARE, or assign or
v sub-license any right to use the SOFTWARE to anyone else; or adapt, modify or alter the SOFTWARE,
or merge any program with the SOFTWARE, or make any
vi derivative or secondary copyrighted work from the SOFTWARE; or remove, erase or make unclear any
copyright notice of the SOFTWARE; or
vii analyze or make reverse-engineering to, the SOFTWARE by decompiling or disassembling it; or
viii make a copy of the instruction manual and other documents contained in this package.
(3) EXCHANGING OF MEMORY MEANS, ETC.

(a) If USER desires to exchange the INSTRUMENT’s internal memory means in which the SOFTWARE
has been installed, USER shall so notify TOPCON in writing directly or through its subsidiary,
affiliate,distributor or agent prior to said reformat, etc. TOPCON will replace the memory means if
necessary.
(b) IN NO EVENT SHALL TOPCON OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES, AFFILIATES, DISTRIBUTORS OR
AGENTS BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT
OF,RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY OF THE ACTS MENTIONED ABOVE
IF IT IS DONE BY USER WITHOUT SAID NOTICE, OR IN NON-COMPLIANCE WITH ANY
INSTRUCTION FROM TOPCON.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-43
(4) COPYRIGHT
The SOFTWARE is the exclusive property of TOPCON, and full title, ownership and interests and
copyrights thereof shall remain vested with TOPCON at any and all times. Digia Plc and its licenser possess
the copyright and the intellectual property right of Qt.
(5) TERM
These LICENSE TERMS shall commence on the date when the SOFTWARE is first used by USER, and
shall remain in full force until the termination hereof pursuant to the provisions set out in step (6) below.
(6) TERMINATION
(a) These LICENSE TERMS shall be forthwith terminated if:
i USER decides to cease use of the INSTRUMENT (in this event, USER shall, without delay, notify
TOPCON in writing of such decision ); or
ii USER fails to comply with any term or condition of these LICENSE TERMS.
(b) Upon any termination of these LICENSE TERMS, USER shall immediately cease to use the
INSTRUMENT in any manner. Any memory paid by USER shall not be refunded after use or
installation by USER of the INSTRUMENT for any reason whatsoever including any termination of
these LICENSE TERMS.
(c) Any and all provisions set out in step (3)-(b), (4), (6)-(b) and (7) through (11) shall survive any
termination of these LICENSE TERMS.
(7) LIMITED WARRANTY

(a) In the event that a hidden material defect is found by USER, USER shall notify TOPCON in writing of
such defect directly or through its subsidiary, affiliate, distributor or agent within ninety (90) days after
USER has received the SOFTWARE. TOPCON shall, at its sole discretion, elect to either repair such
defect, or exchange with new software, with no charge to USER, subject to the condition that TOPCON
has confirmed the existence of such defect which is attributable to TOPCON and has judged that such
defect is material.
TOPCON shall not be liable for any and all obligations under this step (7) if the hidden defect is not
notified within said ninety (90)-day period, or any defect has arisen out of, resulted from or in connection
with any abuse, misuse, accident, neglect or unauthorized use or repair, or any other improper use, etc.
which is not attributable to TOPCON. TOPCON shall not give any warranty to the USER for "Qt" instead
of Digia Plc, regardless of step (7).
(b) THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND.
TOPCON FURTHER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT, EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED
HEREIN.
THE ENTIRE RISK ARISING OUT OF, RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE REMAINS WITH THE USER. IN NO EVENT
SHALL TOPCON OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES, AFFILIATES, DISTRIBUTORS OR AGENTS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
PUNITIVE, OR OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
MEDICAL, CLINICAL OR BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR
PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE) ARISING OUT OF, RESULTING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THESE LICENSE TERMS OR THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-44
(8) COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

Any and all exports or re-exports of the SOFTWARE are subject to Japanese Exchange and Foreign
Trade Law and other Japanese-related laws and regulations, and/or the United States Export Administration
Act, its implementing regulations as well as other U.S. export laws and regulations. Export or reexport of the
SOFTWARE in a manner contrary to either Japanese or U.S. law or regulation is strictly prohibited.
USER shall not export nor re-export to any country the SOFTWARE or any part or copy thereof without
first obtaining all required authorization from the Japanese or United States government.
In addition, with respect to export and re-export of the SOFTWARE, USER shall observe and comply with
any other applicable export laws and regulations of any other countries and shall not export nor reexport
to any country the SOFTWARE or any part or copy thereof in a manner contrary to any other
applicable export laws and regulations of any other countries.
TOPCON OR ITS SUBSIDIARIES, AFFILIATES, DISTRIBUTORS AND AGENTS SHALL NOT BE
RESPONSIBLE NOR LIABLE TO USER FOR ANY LIABILITY, LOSS, DAMAGE, PUNISHMENT,
OR PENALTY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM USER'S VIOLATION OF OR NON-
COMPLIANCE WITH ANY JAPANESE, U.S. OR OTHER APPLICABLE COUNTRY'S EXPORT
CONTROL LAWS OR REGULATIONS.
(9) ADDENDUM STIPULATIONS OF Qt

The USER shall understand and agree to the following items about Qt.
(a) Qt is not designed, intended or licensed to be used in the machines or for the purposes described
below;
• any system, device or product that will be used for the surgical implantation, the life-saving or
lifesupporting application and the air craft or atomic furnace;
• any application in which the defects, improper operation or malfunction of Qt may cause any injury,
death or direct/indirect serious damage to properties.
(b) The USER shall be responsible to check the compatibility of Qt for the relevant situation or application.
(c) These LICENSE TERMS provide the distribution of risk between Qt and the USER. The risk
distribution is effectuated in the fare needed for the license (the price equivalent to it).
(10) GOVERNING LAW

The validity, performance, construction, interpretation, effect and enforcement of these LICENSETERMS
shall be governed by and under the laws of Japan.
(11) ENTIRE AGREEMENT

These LICENSE TERMS constitute the entire agreement between USER and TOPCON with respect to
the subject matter hereof, and shall supersede and cancel any and all prior written or oral agreements,
undertakings, negotiations, communications, commitments, representations, publications and
advertisement,etc. not specifically and expressly incorporated herein.
(12) OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE

The following open source softwares are packaged with this product. For each open source software,
follow its license terms.
IPA font: http://ipafont.ipa.go.jp/

libxml: http://www.xmlsoft.org/

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-45
11.11 Installation of Clean Booth during Repair of Medical Devices
1. Overview
When disassembling and assembling medical devices, repair work is performed in the clean booth to
prevent dust and dirt from entering the interior of the device. In particular, it is recommended to work in a
clean booth when parts inside the optical system are exposed. The purpose of this service news is to inform
the outline of the Clean Booth and the specifications required for the installation.
2. Device overview
Clean booth is a space that eliminates dust, dust, and foreign matter as much as possible and maintains a
certain degree of cleanliness, and a device for maintaining the same. Clean booths are made of UV-cut,
transparent, and black sheets that divide the space. Clean air is circulated through the fan filter unit (FFU)
and the HEPA filter or ULPA filter to maintain the cleanliness of the air. The FFU typically sucks clean air
from the ceiling and exhales it down.
3. Air cleanliness standards and classes

A cleanliness class is an index that grades cleanliness levels. For example, the rating for particle
concentration is determined by the degree of particle concentration by particle size. In ISO14664 1 and JIS
B 9920, the cleanliness class is represented by the number of small particles with a particle size of 0.1μm or
more contained in 1m3. ISOs are classified into Classes 1 to 9, and JISs are classified into Classes 1 to 8.
4.Type of air cleanliness standard

Standard Remarks
ISO14644-1 ISO International Standards
JIS B 9920 JIS standards (consistent with ISO in 2002)
Fed. Std. 209E U.S. Federal Standard
Measured particle size and upper limit concentration according to cleanliness class
ISO14644-1 Fed. Std. 209E Upper limit density (of units/m3)
Measured particle size
0.1μm 0.2μm 0.3μm 0.5μm 1.0μm 5.0μm
Cleanness class
Class1 - 10 2 - - - -
Class2 - 100 24 10 - - -
Class3 Class 1 1,000 237 102 35 - -
Class4 Class 10 10,000 2,370 1,020 352 83 -
Class5 Class 100 100,000 23,700 10,200 3,520 832 -
Class6 Class 1,000 1,000,000 237,000 102,000 35,200 8,320 293
Class7 Class 10,000 - - - 352,000 83,200 2,930
Class8 Class 100,000 - - - 3,520,000 832,000 29,300
Class9 - - - - 35,200,000 8,320,000 293,000
Required standard
The cleanliness class of medical devices is Class8(ISO14644-1, class 100,000 (Fed. Std. 209E) is the
required standard.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-46
5. To check the performance of the clean booth

Use the particle counter to check the cleanliness of the clean booth. Particle counters (Particle Counter) can measure
the amounts of dust, dust, foreign matter, dust, etc. in air and liquids. Use a particle counter to check and maintain the
performance of the clean booth.
Class8(ISO14644 1, Class 1,000 (Fed. Std. Use the particle counter corresponding to the measurement in 209E).
<Measurement method reference (example)>

Measurement method :a) Measuring instrument particle counter
b) Measured height: 100 cm above floor
c) Sample flow rate 0.1 CF (0.1 cubic foot)
d) Particle size 0.5μm
e) Working conditions of the measurement environment
f) One central part of the measuring station booth
<Calibration of Particle Counter>
Calibrate the particle counter according to the ISO 21501 4 standard in order to obtain accurate measured results from
the particle counter for checking the cleanliness in the clean booth.
6. Clean booth management standards

The Clean Booth should be maintained in accordance with the following management standards.
(1) Management of facilities and related facilities
1) In planning the arrangement of facilities and equipment, care shall be taken to eliminate structures that are
easy to accumulate contaminants and to make them easy to clean.
2) Since the effect of dust generated on products by repairing and cleaning equipment is not negligible, the
transportable articles are repaired and cleaned outside the clean booth.
3) In principle, jigs and tools used in clean booths shall be exclusively used in clean booths.
4) Periodically inspect and thoroughly clean and repair. Discard anything that cannot be repaired and
immediately replace it with a new one.
(2) Management of furniture, fixtures, equipment and materials brought in

1) Only the minimum necessary items such as equipment, parts, and furniture shall be brought into the clean
booth.
2) Paper shall be brought in at the minimum necessary, provided that dumbbold shall not be allowed.
(3) Cleaning of facilities and materials brought in

(Cleaning of the booth shall be performed after completion of the work, and the degree of cleanliness shall be
restored by operating the booth until tomorrow.)
1) Cleaning is performed during clean booth operation.
2) The vacuum cleaner shall not seriously disturb the air flow in the clean booth.
3) After completion of the cleaning operation, the clean booth shall be operated until the level of cleanliness
is restored to the specified level.
4) All cleaning tools shall be exclusively used in the Clean Booth.
5) The frequency of room cleaning shall be one day per week.
6) Enter the status of the clean room inspection.
(4) Clean booth clothing management

1) Clean booth clothing includes dust-free clothing, dust-free hats, and dust-free masks.
2) Clean clothes that are dust-free, dust-free caps, and clothes that are worn for one week.
(5) Clean booth entrance method

1) Wear prescribed dust-free clothes, dust-free hats, and dust-free masks in the front room.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-47
(6) Procedures for wearing Clean Booth clothing

1) The dust-free suit should be worn in a standing position so that the sleeve, elbow, heel, etc. are not
contaminated.
2) A dust-free cap is worn so that all of the hair is inside.
(7) Precautions in the Clean Booth

1) Work in clean booths must be done quietly and with great care.
2) In clean booths, do not walk with legs, swing arms, or move unnecessarily.
3) Hands should be washed as necessary.
(8) Exit from Clean Booth

1) Don't remove the Clean Booth clothing until it enters the anterior chamber.
2) In the front chamber, remove the dust-free cap and store it in a predetermined box so as not to be
contaminated.
3) The dust-free suit should be removed from the standing position so that the sleeve, elbow, heel, etc. are
not contaminated, and should be stored in a predetermined box so that the rocker is not contaminated.
7. Other
Refer to the instruction manual provided with the Clean Booth for the maintenance and
management of the Clean Booth.

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
11-48
11.12 Service News History
Date of News No. Title Serial No.

issue
- - - -

R-OCT1-1-1901-04
R-OCT1-1-1901-04
R-OCT1-1-1901-04

3D OCT-1 Maestro2 RM E Ver.1.02 (R-OCT-1-1901-04) Compressed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3D OCT-1 Maestro2 RM E Ver.1.02 (R-OCT-1-1901-04) Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PGOCTB00019-02

3D OPTICAL COHERENCE TOMOGRAPHY

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

1.OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

2.PRODUCT OUTLINE ........................................................................................................ 2-1

3.OPERATION PRINCIPLE .................................................................................................. 3-1

4.SETTING AT SHIPMENT................................................................................................... 4-1

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

6.Repair practice ................................................................................................................. 6-1

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

8.Error Message List........................................................................................................... 8-1

9.Check sheet...................................................................................................................... 9-1

10.TOOL LIST .................................................................................................................... 10-1

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Observation & photographing of anterior segment

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

(1) Description of the display

(2) Symbol displayed on the outside of the main unit

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

This instrument must not be used for the following patients:

Preventing Electric Shocks and Fires

Proposition65 warning sentence

Ensuring the Safety of Patients and Operators

Preventing Electric Shocks and Burn

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

(1) Cleaning the objective lens

(2) Maintenance of electromagnetic compatibility

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

POSITIONS OF WARNING AND CAUTION INDICATIONS

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

• If you have Chinrest unit during transportation, unpacking or at installation,

Place where the equipment is locatedHow to Hold Equipment

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

CONNESTING THE POWER CORD

CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINALS

LAN output USB input

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

RESTORATION FROM POWER SAVE STATE

ADJUSTING THE CONTROL PANEL POSITION

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

USERS OF THE REPAIR MANUAL AND NOTES

HOW TO USE THE REPAIR MANUAL

Confirmation of defective Disassembly and assembly Chapter 6.1

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

CONDUCT AT REPAIR TRAINING

Before participation in repair seminars (e-learning)

Chapters 2 and 3 Product Summaries and Principles

Chapter 4 Shipping Settings

Chapter 5 Software Update

Confirmation of Chapter 7 (including content of Chapters 6, 8, 9 and 10)

Confirmation of understanding after participation in repair seminars

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

2.2 Optical system layout diagram

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited

2.2.2 Optical system part nomenclature and functions

Confidential, duplication and reproduction prohibited